WO2022148463A1 - Lampe à del et module d'avertissement de mauvaise utilisation - Google Patents

Lampe à del et module d'avertissement de mauvaise utilisation Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022148463A1
WO2022148463A1 PCT/CN2022/071054 CN2022071054W WO2022148463A1 WO 2022148463 A1 WO2022148463 A1 WO 2022148463A1 CN 2022071054 W CN2022071054 W CN 2022071054W WO 2022148463 A1 WO2022148463 A1 WO 2022148463A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
circuit
power supply
signal
led
module
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/071054
Other languages
English (en)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
陈俊仁
熊爱明
周林
游海波
Original Assignee
嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司 filed Critical 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司
Publication of WO2022148463A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022148463A1/fr
Priority to US18/219,737 priority Critical patent/US20240093841A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21—LIGHTING
    • F21K—NON-ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES USING LUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING ELECTROCHEMILUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING CHARGES OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL; LIGHT SOURCES USING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AS LIGHT-GENERATING ELEMENTS; LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21K9/00—Light sources using semiconductor devices as light-generating elements, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] or lasers
    • F21K9/20—Light sources comprising attachment means
    • F21K9/27—Retrofit light sources for lighting devices with two fittings for each light source, e.g. for substitution of fluorescent tubes
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01R—MEASURING ELECTRIC VARIABLES; MEASURING MAGNETIC VARIABLES
    • G01R31/00—Arrangements for testing electric properties; Arrangements for locating electric faults; Arrangements for electrical testing characterised by what is being tested not provided for elsewhere
    • G01R31/44—Testing lamps
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01R—MEASURING ELECTRIC VARIABLES; MEASURING MAGNETIC VARIABLES
    • G01R31/00—Arrangements for testing electric properties; Arrangements for locating electric faults; Arrangements for electrical testing characterised by what is being tested not provided for elsewhere
    • G01R31/50—Testing of electric apparatus, lines, cables or components for short-circuits, continuity, leakage current or incorrect line connections
    • G01R31/52—Testing for short-circuits, leakage current or ground faults

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of LED lighting, in particular to an LED lamp and a misuse warning module.
  • LED lamps Because of its high efficiency and environmental protection, LED lamps have gradually replaced fluorescent lamps as the fourth generation of lighting products.
  • the LED straight tube light can be a T5 or T8 type lamp.
  • T5 or T8 type lamp There are potential safety hazards during installation and construction. There is a risk of electric shock if a person touches the pins on the other end.
  • installation and detection devices are generally installed on the lamp tubes.
  • the mechanical installation detection device is provided with a mechanical device on the lamp holder. Only after the lamp tube is correctly installed in the lamp socket, the pins are connected to the power to prevent electric shock during the installation process; the electronic installation detection device is installed on the lamp tube.
  • the power supply circuit is turned on for a very short moment, during the detection and conduction period, it is judged whether the lamp is installed correctly according to the current or voltage in the circuit. Open the power supply circuit to ensure human safety.
  • this type of electronic installation detection device is powered by an emergency ballast, because the emergency ballast provides a DC power supply signal, at this time, even if the installer touches the lamp pin, there is no risk of electric shock; Furthermore, the DC power supply signal may cause the installation detection module to fail to detect normally, and the LED light to fail to light normally.
  • the LED straight tube lamp can be, for example, a T5 or T8 type lamp.
  • installation and detection devices are generally installed on the lamp tubes.
  • the mechanical installation detection device is provided with a mechanical device on the lamp holder. Only after the lamp tube is correctly installed in the lamp socket, the pins are connected to the power to prevent electric shock during the installation process; the electronic installation detection device is installed on the lamp tube.
  • the power supply circuit is turned on for a very short moment, during the detection and conduction period, it is judged whether the lamp is installed correctly according to the current or voltage in the circuit. Open the power supply circuit to ensure human safety.
  • an LED lamp using a commercial power signal When an LED lamp using a commercial power signal is connected to an incompatible external power signal, such as a power signal provided by an electronic ballast or an inductive ballast, it may fail to work normally or even burn out. Generally, the specific wiring method will be clearly informed to the user in the installation manual of the luminaire, but it is still unavoidable that the user may misuse it.
  • the electronic installation detection device When the line impedance of the power supply loop is large, the electronic installation detection device will misjudge the line impedance of the power supply loop as the human body being connected to the power supply loop. In this case, the LED light cannot be lit normally.
  • the driving power used in traditional lamps is divided into inductive ballasts or electronic ballasts.
  • the LED lamps may not be able to light up or may occur. Burn down or even fire accident.
  • the present application provides a misuse warning module, which is characterized by comprising a detection circuit electrically connected to a power supply loop of an LED lamp for detecting the type of external power signal and the current level of the power supply loop to generate a detection signal; and
  • the prompting circuit is used to receive the detection signal and issue a prompt when the LED lamp is installed abnormally.
  • the detection circuit includes a first detection circuit, which is electrically connected to a power supply circuit of the LED lamp for detecting the current level of the power supply circuit, and outputs the first detection circuit when the current is greater than a set threshold. a detection signal, and outputting a second detection signal when the current is less than or equal to a set threshold.
  • the detection circuit further includes a second detection circuit electrically connected to the input end of the external power source for outputting a third detection signal when the external power signal is a DC signal.
  • the detection circuit further includes a third detection circuit, which is electrically connected to the input end of the external power source and used to output a fourth detection signal when the external power signal is provided by the electronic ballast, wherein the The third detection circuit determines whether the external power signal is provided by the electronic ballast by detecting at least one of the frequency, phase and amplitude of the external power signal.
  • the first detection circuit includes a detection pulse generation module for generating a pulse signal; a switch circuit coupled to the power supply circuit for turning on or off according to the pulse signal; and A detection and determination circuit is used to detect the current level of the power supply circuit when the switch circuit is turned on, when the current is greater than a set threshold, output the first detection signal and output the first detection signal when the current is less than or equal to the set threshold the second detection signal.
  • the switch circuit is configured to be turned on according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal.
  • the prompt circuit is used to instruct the switch circuit to be intermittently turned on according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal, so as to make the LED light flash.
  • the switch circuit is configured to be disconnected according to the second detection circuit and/or the fourth detection signal
  • the prompt circuit is configured to be disconnected according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal Issue a prompt
  • the prompt circuit includes at least one of the following: a buzzer and a prompt light, and the buzzer or the prompt light is used to issue a prompt according to the second detection signal.
  • the misuse warning module further includes a current limiting circuit, which is connected in series with the power supply loop to turn on the power supply loop according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal, and The power supply circuit is intermittently turned on according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal to make the LED lights flash.
  • the misuse warning module further includes a current limiting circuit, which is connected in series with the power supply loop to turn on the power supply loop according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal, and The power supply circuit is disconnected according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal, and the prompt circuit is configured to issue a prompt according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal.
  • the prompt circuit includes at least one of the following: a buzzer and a prompt light, and the buzzer or the prompt light is used to issue a prompt according to the second detection signal.
  • the present application provides an LED lamp, which is characterized in that it includes at least two pins, a first pin and a second pin, for receiving an external driving signal; a power module is electrically connected to the first pin and the second pin.
  • the second pin is used to convert the power of the external driving signal to generate a driving signal; the LED module is used to receive the driving signal and light up;
  • a detection module is installed to detect the current in the power supply loop , and determine whether to limit the current of the power supply loop according to the current level of the power supply loop; and an impedance adjustment module, electrically connected to the first pin and the second pin, for adjusting the impedance of the power supply loop , so as to affect the judgment of the installation detection module, wherein when a first resistor is connected in series in the power supply loop, the installation detection module limits the current of the power supply loop, and the LED lights cannot be normally lit; when at least two or more When several of the LED lights are connected in parallel, the installation detection module does not limit the current of the power supply circuit, and
  • the resistance value of the first resistor is 100-500 ohms.
  • the impedance adjustment module includes a first capacitor, a first pin of the first capacitor is electrically connected to the first pin, and a second pin thereof is electrically connected to the first pin Two pins.
  • the capacitance of the first capacitor is 30-50nF.
  • the capacitance of the first capacitor is 47nF.
  • the installation detection module includes: a detection pulse generation module for generating a pulse signal; a switch circuit coupled to the power supply circuit for turning on or off according to the pulse signal; and A detection and determination circuit is used to detect the current level of the power supply circuit when the switch circuit is turned on, and when the current is greater than a set threshold, a first detection signal is output, wherein the switch circuit conducts a signal according to the first detection signal Pass.
  • 1A is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp of the first embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube;
  • 1B is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the second embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube;
  • 1C is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp of the third embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube;
  • FIG. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of a lamp panel of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a lamp panel of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp and a printed circuit board of a power module according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 5A to 5C are partial schematic diagrams of a welding process of a lamp board and a power source according to an embodiment of the present application
  • 5D is a partial schematic diagram of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5E is a plan cross-sectional view of the connection between the lamp board of the LED straight tube lamp and the circuit board of the power module according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 5F is a schematic partial structure diagram of a light source pad of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5G is a schematic partial structure diagram of a power pad of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6A is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of a lamp board and a power module of an LED straight tube lamp according to the first embodiment of the present application;
  • 6B is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of a lamp board and a power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the second embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an inner wire of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 8C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 8E is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 9A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 9B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 9C is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • 10A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 10B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 10C is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 10D is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10E is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 10F is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 10G is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 10H is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 10I is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 11A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 11C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 11D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 11E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 11F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12A is a schematic block diagram of a filter circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 12C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filtering unit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filtering unit according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 12H is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filter unit and a negative pressure elimination unit according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 13A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 13B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 13C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 13D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 13E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 14A is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 14B is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 14C is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 14D is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 15A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 15B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 15C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 15D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 15E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 15F is a schematic diagram of a partial circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 15G is a schematic diagram of a partial circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 15H is a schematic diagram of a partial circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 16A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 16B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 16C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 16D is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • 16E is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 16F is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power supply module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • 16G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 16H is a schematic circuit block diagram of an auxiliary power supply module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • 16I is a schematic configuration diagram of an auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 16J is a schematic configuration diagram of an auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 16K is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 16L is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 16M is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • 16N is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • auxiliary power supply module 160 is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an auxiliary power supply module according to a second embodiment of the present application.
  • 16P is a signal timing diagram when the auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application is in a normal state
  • 16Q is a signal timing diagram when the auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application is in an abnormal state
  • 17A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application.
  • 17B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 17C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 17D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 17E is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 17F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the impedance adjustment module according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 17G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the impedance adjustment module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 19A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 19B to 19F are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 19H is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 19I is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 20A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 20B to 20E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 21A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an installation detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • 21B to 21E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 22A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 22B to 22F are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 22B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal processing unit in which a detection module is installed according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
  • 22C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal generating unit of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 22D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal acquisition unit installed with a detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
  • 22E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch unit in which a detection module is installed according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
  • 22F is a schematic circuit block diagram of an internal power supply detection unit of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 23A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an installation detection module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 23B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 23C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 23D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 23E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module with a stroboscopic suppression function according to the first embodiment of the present application;
  • 24A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 24B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 24C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 25A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 25B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 25C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • 25D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • 26A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to an eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • 26B is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to an eleventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 28A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 28B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 29 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application.
  • 30A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an installation detection module according to an eleventh embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 30B to FIG. 30D and FIG. 30G are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 30E is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 30F is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 30H is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the twelfth embodiment of the present application.
  • 30I is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the power supply module with constant current driving, electric shock detection and dimming functions according to the first embodiment of the present application;
  • 31A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the twelfth embodiment of the present application.
  • 31B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 32A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 32B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a control circuit of an installation detection module according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 33A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 33B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 33C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 34A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 34B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit with the electric shock detection function according to the first embodiment of the present application;
  • 35A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 35B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 35C is a schematic circuit block diagram of an integrated controller according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 35D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 36 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 37A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 37B and 37C are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 37B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generation module installed with a detection module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application;
  • 37C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection path circuit for installing a detection module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 38 is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 39A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the bias circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 39B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the bias circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 40 is a schematic circuit block diagram of a detection pulse generation module according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 41A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection pulse generation module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 41B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection pulse generation module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the ballast detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 43A is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 43B is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 43C is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 43D is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 43E-FIG. 43G are schematic waveform diagrams of path detection signals according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 44 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 45A to 45G are schematic diagrams of signal timings of power modules according to different embodiments of the present application.
  • 45H-45K are schematic diagrams of bus signal waveforms of different embodiments of the present application.
  • 46A is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 46B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the misuse warning module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 46C is a schematic circuit block diagram of a misuse warning module according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • 46D is a schematic circuit block diagram of a misuse detection circuit according to an embodiment of the application.
  • 46E is a schematic circuit block diagram of a misuse detection circuit according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • 46F is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power module according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • 46G is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a misuse detection circuit according to an embodiment of the application
  • 47A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 47B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a prompting circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 48A is a flow chart of the steps of the electric shock detection method according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 48B is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 48C is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 48D is a flow chart of the steps of the control method of the misuse warning module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 48E is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 48F is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module of the fourth embodiment of the application.
  • 48G is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 49A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to a ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • 49B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 49C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 50A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 50B is a schematic circuit block diagram of a configuration mode of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 50C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 50D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 50E is a schematic circuit block diagram of a configuration mode of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 51 is a schematic block diagram of the surge protection circuit of the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 53A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 53B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 53C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 53D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 53E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 53F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 53G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 53H is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • 53I is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED lamp lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 55A is a schematic block diagram of the circuit of the LED lamp lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 55B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an LED lamp lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • 55C is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an LED lamp lighting system according to a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED lamp 200 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 57A is a schematic diagram of the operation flow of the LED lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 57B is a schematic diagram of the operation flow of the LED lamp lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the present application proposes a new LED straight tube lamp to solve the problems mentioned in the background art and the above problems.
  • specific embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • the following description of each embodiment of the present application is only for illustration and example, and does not represent all embodiments of the present application or limit the present application to a specific embodiment.
  • the same component numbers may be used to represent the same, corresponding or similar components, and are not limited to represent the same components.
  • each embodiment is described below by way of a plurality of embodiments. It does not mean, however, that each embodiment can only be implemented in isolation.
  • Those skilled in the art can design together feasible implementation examples according to requirements, or bring and replace replaceable components/modules in different embodiments according to design requirements.
  • the embodiments taught in this case are not limited to the aspects described in the following embodiments, but also include, where feasible, the belt exchange and arrangement among the various embodiments/components/modules, which will be described here first. .
  • FIG. 1A is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the first embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube.
  • the LED straight tube light includes a light panel 2 and a power source 5 , wherein the power source 5 can be a modular type, that is, the power source 5 can be an integrated power module.
  • the power source 5 can be an integrated single unit (for example, all the components of the power source 5 are arranged in a body) and arranged in a lamp cap at one end of the lamp tube.
  • the power supply 5 may be two separate components (eg, the components of the power supply 5 are divided into two parts) and provided in the two lamp caps, respectively.
  • the power supply 5 is shown as an example integrated into a module (hereinafter referred to as the power supply module 5, also referred to as a power supply device), and the power supply module 5 is arranged parallel to the axial direction of the lamp tube at cyd in the lamp head.
  • the axial direction cyd of the lamp tube refers to the direction in which the axis line of the lamp tube points, which is perpendicular to the end wall of the lamp cap.
  • the axial direction cyd of the power module 5 being parallel to the lamp tube means that the circuit board of the power module configured with the electronic components is parallel to the axial direction cyd, that is, the normal of the circuit board is perpendicular to the axial direction cyd.
  • the power module 5 can be set to the position where the axial cyd passes, the upper side or the lower side of the axial cyd (relative to the drawings), which is not limited in the present application.
  • FIG. 1B is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the second embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube.
  • the power module 5 is disposed in the lamp cap perpendicular to the axial direction cyd of the lamp tube, that is, parallel to the end wall of the lamp cap.
  • the drawings show that the electronic components on the power module 5 are arranged on the side facing the inside of the lamp tube, the present application is not limited to this.
  • the electronic components may also be disposed on the side close to the end wall of the lamp cap. Under this configuration, since the lamp cap can be provided with an opening, the heat dissipation effect of the electronic components can be improved.
  • the power module 5 can be further split into a configuration of multiple circuit boards, as shown in FIG. 1C , wherein FIG. 1C is a A plane cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the third embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube.
  • FIG. 1C is a A plane cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the third embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube.
  • the power supply 5 is composed of two power supply modules 5a and 5b. 5a and 5b are facing the end wall of the lamp cap and arranged in sequence along the axial direction cyd.
  • the power modules 5a and 5b respectively have independent circuit boards, and corresponding electronic components are arranged on the circuit boards, wherein the two circuit boards can be connected together through various electrical connection means, so that the overall power circuit
  • the topology is similar to the previous Figure 1A or Figure 1B embodiment.
  • the accommodating space in the lamp head can be used more effectively, so that the circuit layout space of the power modules 5 a and 5 b is larger.
  • electronic components such as capacitors and inductors
  • the circuit boards of the power modules 5a and 5b can adopt an octagonal structure to maximize the layout area.
  • the separated power modules 5a and 5b can be connected by male plugs and female plugs, or connected by wire bonding, and the outer layer of the wire can be wrapped with an insulating sleeve as a Electrical insulation protection.
  • the power modules 5a and 5b can also be directly connected together by means of rivets, solder paste bonding, welding or wire binding.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of a lamp panel of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the flexible circuit board used as the light board 2 includes a circuit layer 2a with a conductive effect.
  • the LED light source 202 is arranged on the circuit layer 2a and is electrically connected to the power supply through the circuit layer 2a.
  • the circuit layer having a conductive effect may also be referred to as a conductive layer.
  • the flexible circuit board may further include a dielectric layer 2b, which is stacked with the circuit layer 2a. The area of the dielectric layer 2b and the circuit layer 2a is equal to or slightly smaller than that of the dielectric layer.
  • the circuit layer 2a is used for disposing the LED light source 202 on the surface opposite to the dielectric layer 2b.
  • the circuit layer 2a is electrically connected to a power source 5 (refer to FIG. 1 ) for allowing a DC current to pass therethrough.
  • the dielectric layer 2b is adhered to the inner peripheral surface of the lamp tube 1 through the adhesive sheet 4 on the surface opposite to the circuit layer 2a.
  • the circuit layer 2a may be a metal layer, or a power supply layer with wires (eg, copper wires).
  • the outer surfaces of the circuit layer 2a and the dielectric layer 2b may each be covered with a circuit protection layer, and the circuit protection layer may be an ink material with functions of solder resist and reflection enhancement.
  • the flexible circuit board can be a one-layer structure, that is, it is composed of only one layer of circuit layer 2a, and then the surface of the circuit layer 2a is covered with a circuit protection layer of the above-mentioned ink material, and the protection layer can be provided with openings , so that the light source can be electrically connected to the circuit layer.
  • Either a one-layer circuit layer 2a structure or a two-layer structure (a layer of circuit layer 2a and a layer of dielectric layer 2b) can be matched with a circuit protection layer.
  • the circuit protection layer can also be provided on one surface of the flexible circuit board, for example, the circuit protection layer is only provided on the side with the LED light source 202 .
  • the flexible circuit flexible board is a one-layer circuit layer structure 2a or a two-layer structure (a layer of circuit layer 2a and a layer of dielectric layer 2b), which is significantly higher than the general three-layer flexible substrate (two-layer circuit layer).
  • a dielectric layer is sandwiched between layers) is more flexible and bendable, so it can be matched with lamps 1 with special shapes (for example, non-straight lamps), and the flexible circuit soft board can be closely attached on the tube wall of lamp 1.
  • the flexible circuit board it is a better configuration for the flexible circuit board to be close to the tube wall, and the fewer layers of the flexible circuit board, the better the heat dissipation effect, and the lower the material cost, the more environmentally friendly, and the flexibility There is also a chance to improve the effect.
  • the flexible circuit board of the present application is not limited to a one-layer or two-layer circuit board.
  • the flexible circuit board includes a multilayer circuit layer 2a and a multilayer dielectric layer 2b.
  • the layer 2b and the circuit layer 2a are alternately stacked in sequence and are arranged on the side of the circuit layer 2a opposite to the LED light source 202.
  • the LED light source 202 is arranged on the uppermost layer of the multilayer circuit layer 2a, passing through the uppermost layer of the circuit layer 2a.
  • the layer is in electrical communication with the power source.
  • the axial projection length of the flexible circuit board as the light board 2 is greater than the length of the light tube.
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the flexible circuit board serving as the light board 2 includes a first circuit layer 2a, a dielectric layer 2b and a second circuit layer 2c in sequence from top to bottom.
  • the thickness is greater than the thickness of the first circuit layer 2a
  • the axial projection length of the lamp board 2 is greater than the length of the lamp tube 1, and the first circuit
  • the layer 2a and the second circuit layer 2c are electrically connected through two through holes 203 and 204, respectively, but the through holes 203 and 204 are not connected to each other to avoid short circuit.
  • the thickness of the second circuit layer 2c is relatively large, the effect of supporting the first circuit layer 2a and the dielectric layer 2b can be achieved. Offset or deformation to improve manufacturing yield.
  • the first circuit layer 2a and the second circuit layer 2c are electrically connected, so that the circuit layout on the first circuit layer 2a can be extended to the second circuit layer 2c, so that the circuit layout on the lamp board 2 is more diverse.
  • the original circuit layout and wiring are changed from single layer to double layer.
  • the single layer area of the circuit layer on the light board 2 that is, the size in the width direction, can be further reduced, allowing the number of light boards to be solidified in batches. Can increase and improve productivity.
  • first circuit layer 2a and the second circuit layer 2c which are provided with the LED light source 202 on the lamp board 2 and protrude from the end region of the lamp tube 1, can also be directly used to realize the circuit layout of the power module, so that the The power module is directly configured on the flexible circuit board.
  • connection method between the lamp board 2 and the power source 5 is preferably selected as welding.
  • FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp and a printed circuit board of a power module according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the specific method can be to leave the output end of the power supply 5 to the power supply pad a, and leave tin on the power supply pad a, so that the thickness of the tin on the pad is increased, which is convenient for welding.
  • the light source pad b is also left on the end of the lamp board 2 , and the power pad a of the output end of the power source 5 and the light source pad b of the lamp board 2 are welded together.
  • the plane where the pads are located is defined as the front side, and the connection between the lamp board 2 and the power supply 5 is the most stable with the pads on the front of the two, but the welding indenter is typically pressed on the back of the lamp board 2 during welding.
  • the lamp board 2 is used to heat the solder, which is more prone to reliability problems. If in some embodiments, a hole is opened in the middle of the light source pad b on the front of the lamp board 2, and then the front side is superimposed on the power pad a on the front of the power source 5 for welding, the welding indenter can be directly connected to the solder. Heating and melting is relatively easy to achieve in practice.
  • the free portion 21 has the above-mentioned light source pad b, one end of which is welded with the power source 5 , the other end of which is integrally extended and connected to the fixed portion 22 , and the part between the two ends of the free portion 21 is not connected to the inner circumference of the lamp tube 1 .
  • Surface fit that is, the middle section of the free portion 21 is in a suspended state.
  • the welded end of the free portion 21 and the power source 5 will drive the free portion 21 to shrink toward the inside of the lamp tube 1 . It is worth noting that when the flexible circuit board as the light board 2 has a structure of two-layer circuit layers 2a and 2c sandwiching a dielectric layer 2b as shown in FIG.
  • the aforementioned light board 2 is not provided with the LED light source 202
  • the end area protruding from the lamp tube 1 can be used as the free portion 21, and the free portion 21 can realize the connection of the two-layer circuit layer and the circuit layout of the power module.
  • the pin design of the LED straight tube lamp it may be a structure of single pins at both ends (two pins in total) or double pins at both ends (four pins in total). Therefore, in the case of feeding power from both ends of the LED straight tube lamp, at least one pin at each end of the LED can be used to receive the external driving signal.
  • the wires arranged between each pin of the double ends are typically called live wires (generally marked as "L") and neutral/neutral wires (generally marked as "N”), and can be used for signal input and transmission .
  • FIGS. 5A to 5C are partial schematic diagrams of the welding process of the lamp board and the power source according to an embodiment of the present application, which illustrate the connection structure and connection between the lamp board 2 and the power circuit board 420 of the power source 5 Way.
  • the lamp board 2 has the same structure as the aforementioned FIG. 4 , the free part is the part at the opposite ends of the lamp board 2 used to connect the power circuit board 420 , and the fixed part is that the lamp board 2 is attached to the lamp tube part of the inner surface.
  • the light board 2 is a flexible circuit board, and the light board 2 includes a laminated circuit layer 200a and a circuit protection layer 200c.
  • the side of the circuit layer 200a away from the circuit protection layer 200c is defined as the first side 2001, and the side of the circuit protection layer 200c away from the circuit layer 200a is defined as the second side 2002, that is, the first side 2001 and the second side 2002 are Opposite sides of the light panel 2.
  • a plurality of LED light sources 202 are disposed on the first surface 2001 and are electrically connected to the circuits of the circuit layer 200a.
  • the circuit protection layer 200c is a polyimide layer (Polyimide, PI), which is not easy to conduct heat, but has the effect of protecting the circuit.
  • the first surface 2001 of the lamp board 2 has a pad b on which the solder g is placed, and the welding end of the lamp board 2 has a gap f.
  • the power supply circuit board 420 includes a power supply circuit layer 420a, and the power supply circuit board 420 defines a first surface 421 and a second surface 422 opposite to each other, and the second surface 422 is located on the side of the power supply circuit board 420 with the power supply circuit layer 420a.
  • Pads a corresponding to each other are respectively formed on the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 of the power circuit board 420 , and solder g may be formed on the pads a.
  • the lamp board 2 is placed under the power circuit board 420 (refer to the direction of FIG. 5A ), that is, the first surface 2001 of the lamp board 2 is connected to the The second side 422 of the power circuit board 420 .
  • the circuit protection layer 200C of the lamp board 2 is first placed on the support table 42 (the second surface 2002 of the lamp board 2 is in contact with each other). Support table 42), let the pad a of the second side 422 of the power circuit board 420 and the pad b of the first side 2001 of the lamp board 2 directly and fully contact, and then press the soldering indenter 41 on the lamp board 2 and the power circuit Welding of plate 420.
  • the heat of the soldering indenter 41 will be directly transmitted to the soldering pad b of the first surface 2001 of the lamp board 2 through the pad a of the first side 421 of the power circuit board 420, and the heat of the soldering indenter 41 will not be affected by
  • the influence of the circuit protection layer 200c with relatively poor thermal conductivity further improves the efficiency and stability of soldering where the pads a and b of the lamp board 2 and the power circuit board 420 meet.
  • the pad b of the first side 2001 of the lamp board 2 is in contact with the pad a of the second side 422 of the power circuit board 420, and the pad a of the first side 521 of the power circuit board 520 is in contact with the welding pressure
  • the head 41 is connected.
  • the power circuit board 420 and the lamp board 2 are completely welded together by solder g, and between the virtual lines M and N in FIG.
  • 5C is the main part of the power circuit board 420 , the lamp board 2 and the solder g
  • the connection parts from top to bottom, are the pad a of the first side 421 of the power circuit board 420, the power circuit layer 420a, the pad a of the second side 422 of the power circuit board 420, and the circuit layer of the lamp board 2 200a, the circuit protection layer 200c of the lamp board 2.
  • the combined structure of the power circuit board 420 and the lamp board 2 formed in this order is more stable and firm.
  • another layer of circuit protection layer may be further provided on the first surface 2001 of the circuit layer 200a, that is, the circuit layer 200a will be sandwiched between the two layers of circuit protection layers, so that the circuit layer
  • the first surface 2001 of the 200a can also be protected by a circuit protection layer, and only part of the circuit layer 200a (the part with the pad b) is exposed for connecting with the pad a of the power circuit board 420 .
  • a part of the bottom of the LED light source 202 contacts the circuit protection layer on the first surface 2001 of the circuit layer 200a, and the other part contacts the circuit layer 200a.
  • FIG. 5D is a partial schematic view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application, which illustrates a structure of an insulating sheet with hollow holes k disposed in the free part of the lamp board. Most of them are used for occasions where there are more than two pads on the lamp board 2 .
  • the width of the insulating sheet 210 is approximately the same as the width of the lamp board 2; the length of the insulating sheet 210 is 1 to 50 times the length of the pad, preferably, the length of the edge sheet is 10 times the length of the pad; the insulating sheet 210
  • the thickness of the insulating sheet 210 is 0.5 times to 5 times the thickness of the lamp board 2.
  • the thickness of the insulating sheet 210 is the same as the thickness of the lamp board 2;
  • the area of the pad preferably, the area of the hollow is between 101% and 200% of the area of the pad).
  • the insulating sheet 210 has a generally elongated or elliptical shape as a whole.
  • Such a design has the following advantages; 1. During soldering, the molten solder paste is surrounded so that it does not spread around, reducing the risk of soldering on the pads and short-circuiting between the pads; 2. The lamp board 2 is in contact with the power supply. The ink in the soldering area of the circuit board may be damaged, and the wires covered under it may be exposed.
  • An insulating sheet 210 is added in this area to reduce the risk of short circuit and improve the reliability of soldering; 3;
  • Lamp board 2 is equipped with L or N line, the straight tube lamp using this solution has strong electricity flowing through the lamp board 2 when it is energized (through the layout N line), in some cases, the voltage of the strong electricity in the welding area between the lamp board 2 and the short circuit board exceeds 300V high voltage At this time, the ink covering the surface of the lamp board 2 will be broken down by high voltage, which will cause the conductive layer under the ink to be short-circuited with the short circuit board of the power supply. In this case, by adding an insulating member (insulating sheet 210 ) in this area, the risk of short circuit is reduced, and the reliability of the straight tube lamp is improved.
  • FIG. 5E is a plan cross-sectional view of the connection between the light board of the LED straight tube lamp and the circuit board of the power module according to an embodiment of the present application, which shows A schematic diagram of the pad b41 partially offset from the pad b11.
  • the free part of the lamp board 2 is provided with three pads b10, b11, b12 (the pads are arranged in two rows in the y direction, b10 is a row, b11 and b12 are a row).
  • the circuit board (not shown) is configured with corresponding 3 pads; when soldering, the pads of the lamp board 2 and the circuit board pads of the power supply may be offset along the y direction, at this time, the matching connection pads b11 or b12
  • the configuration is offset on the corresponding pads (also called pads) of the short circuit board of the power supply.
  • the offset portion of the pad b41 (also referred to as the pad b41 ) is pressed between the pads b11 and b12 .
  • this area is configured with a conductive layer that flows through strong electricity, the ink coated on it, in some cases, the ink is broken down by high voltage, causing the conductive layer to be short-circuited with the pads of the short circuit board of the power supply.
  • the pad b10 on the light board 2 is electrically connected to the live wire or the neutral wire
  • the pad b11 corresponds to the first drive output end
  • b12 corresponds to the second drive output end.
  • the pad b10 is electrically connected to the live wire or the neutral wire
  • the pad b11 corresponds to the second driving output terminal
  • the pad b12 corresponds to the first driving output terminal.
  • the pad b10 corresponds to the first driving output terminal
  • the pad b11 corresponds to the second driving output terminal
  • b12 is electrically connected to the live wire or the neutral wire.
  • the pad b10 corresponds to the first driving output terminal
  • the pad b12 corresponds to the second driving output terminal
  • b11 corresponds to the live wire or the neutral wire.
  • FIG. 5F is a partial structural schematic diagram of the light source pads of the LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application, wherein FIG. 5F shows the configuration of the end pads of the lamp board 2 .
  • the pads b1 and b2 on the lamp board 2 are suitable for welding with the power pads of the power circuit board.
  • the pad configuration in this embodiment is applicable to a double-ended single-pin power feeding method, that is, the pads on the same side will receive external driving signals of the same polarity.
  • the pads b1 and b2 of this embodiment are connected together through an S-type fuse FS, wherein the fuse FS can be formed of, for example, a thin wire, and its impedance is quite low, so it can be regarded as the pad b1 and the b2 are shorted together.
  • the pads b1 and b2 will receive external driving signals of the same polarity.
  • the thicknesses of the traces of the pads b1 and b2 and the pad body are at least 0.4 mm, and the actual thickness can be based on the understanding of those skilled in the art. Any thickness of 0.4mm.
  • the thickness of the traces of the pads b1 and b2 and the thickness of the pad body is at least 0.4mm, when the lamp board 2 is connected to the power circuit board through the pad b1 and b2 and placed in the lamp tube , even if the copper foils at the pads b1 and b2 are broken, the extra copper foils around them can connect the light board 2 with the circuit of the power circuit board, so that the light tube can work normally.
  • FIG. 5G is a schematic partial structure diagram of a power pad of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the power supply circuit board may have, for example, three pads a1 , a2 and a3 , and the power supply circuit board may be, for example, a printed circuit board, but the present application is not limited thereto.
  • Each of the pads a1, a2 and a3 is provided with a plurality of through holes hp.
  • a welding substance such as solder
  • the pads a1, a2 and a3 on the power supply circuit board (hereinafter referred to as the power supply pads) It is electrically connected to the pads (eg b1, b2, hereinafter referred to as light source pads) on the light board 2, wherein the light board 2 can be, for example, a flexible circuit board.
  • the adhesive force between the power pads a1 , a2 and a3 and the light source pads is further enhanced.
  • the setting of the perforated hp can also improve the heat dissipation area, so that the thermal characteristics of the lamp tube can be improved.
  • the number of the through holes hp can be selected to be 7 or 9 according to the sizes of the pads a1 , a2 and a3 .
  • the arrangement of perforations hp may be such that 6 perforations hp are arranged on a circle, and the remaining one is arranged on the center of the circle. If a configuration of 9 perforated hp is chosen to be implemented, the perforated hp can be configured in a 3x3 array arrangement. The above configuration selection can preferably increase the contact area and improve the heat dissipation effect.
  • FIGS. 6A and 6B are three-dimensional schematic diagrams of a lamp board and a power module of an LED straight tube lamp according to different embodiments of the present application.
  • the lamp board 2 and the power source 5 fixed by welding can be replaced by a circuit board assembly 25 on which the power source module 5 is mounted.
  • the circuit board assembly 25 has a long circuit board 251 and a short circuit board 253 .
  • the long circuit board 251 and the short circuit board 253 are adhered to each other and fixed by bonding.
  • the short circuit board 253 is located near the periphery of the long circuit board 251 .
  • the short circuit board 253 has the power supply module 25, which constitutes a power supply as a whole.
  • the material of the short circuit board 253 is longer than that of the circuit board 251 , so as to support the power module 5 .
  • the long circuit board 251 may be the above-mentioned flexible circuit board or flexible substrate as the light board 2 , and has the circuit layer 2a shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the electrical connection method of the circuit layer 2a of the light board 2 and the power supply module 5 may have different electrical connection methods according to the actual usage.
  • the power module 5 and the circuit layer 2 a on the long circuit board 251 to be electrically connected to the power module 5 are both located on the same side of the short circuit board 253 , and the power module 5 is directly electrically connected to the long circuit board 251 .
  • FIG. 6A the power module 5 and the circuit layer 2 a on the long circuit board 251 to be electrically connected to the power module 5 are both located on the same side of the short circuit board 253 , and the power module 5 is directly electrically connected to the long circuit board 251 .
  • the circuit layers 2 a on the power module 5 and the long circuit board 251 to be electrically connected to the power module 5 are located on both sides of the short circuit board 253 respectively, and the power module 5 penetrates through the short circuit board 253 and the lamp.
  • the circuit layer 2a of the board 2 is electrically connected.
  • the electronic components of the power module 5 on the left short circuit board 253 may be referred to as the power module 5a, and the electronic components of the power module 5 on the right short circuit board 253 may be referred to as the power module 5b.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an inner wire of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube lamp of the present disclosure may include a lamp tube, a lamp holder (not shown in FIG. 7 ), a lamp board 2 (or a long circuit board 251 ), a short circuit board 253 , and an inductor Lgnd . Both ends of the lamp tube have at least one pin for receiving external driving signals.
  • the pin design of the LED straight tube lamp it can be a structure of single pins at both ends (two pins in total) or double pins at both ends (four pins in total).
  • At least one pin at each end of the LED can be used to receive the external driving signal.
  • the wires arranged between each pin of the double ends are typically called live wires (generally marked as "L”) and neutral/neutral wires (generally marked as "N”), and can be used for signal input and transmission .
  • the lamp caps are disposed at both ends of the lamp tube, and the short circuit boards 253 (at least part of the electronic components) on the left and right sides of the lamp tube as shown in FIG. 7 may be respectively in the lamp caps at the two ends.
  • the light board 2 is disposed in the light tube, and includes an LED module, and the LED module includes an LED unit 632 .
  • the power modules 5a and 5b are respectively electrically connected to the light board 2 through the corresponding short circuit boards 253, and the electrical connection (for example, through the pads) may include a signal terminal (L) connecting both ends of the light board 2.
  • the corresponding pins are respectively used to connect the positive and negative poles of the LED unit 632 through the driving output terminals 531 and 532, and to connect the reference ground of the lamp board 2 through the ground terminal, and the reference ground will be connected to the ground terminal GND through the ground terminal, Therefore, the level of the reference ground can be defined as the ground level.
  • the inductor Lgnd is connected in series between the fourth terminals of the short circuit board 253 at both ends of the lamp tube.
  • the inductor Lgnd may include, for example, a choke inductor or Dual-Inline-Package inductor).
  • part of the power circuit may be set in the lamp holders at both ends.
  • the extended signal wire LL and the ground wire GL need to be arranged along the light board 2 .
  • the signal wire LL is usually very close to the positive wire on the lamp board 2, so parasitic capacitance may be generated between the two.
  • the high frequency interference passing through the positive wire will be reflected on the signal wire LL through the parasitic capacitance, thereby producing a detectable electromagnetic interference (EMI) effect.
  • EMI electromagnetic interference
  • the high impedance characteristic of the inductance Lgnd at high frequencies can be used to block the signal loop of high frequency interference, thereby eliminating the positive pole High-frequency interference on the wire, thereby avoiding the EMI effect of parasitic capacitance reflected on the signal wire LL.
  • the function of the inductor Lgnd is to eliminate or reduce the EMI effect caused by the positive wire LL or be affected by EMI, thus improving the power signal transmission in the lamp tube (including the signal wire LL, the positive wire, and the negative wire) and The quality of LED straight tube lights.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the AC power source 508 (or the external power grid 508 ) is used to provide the AC power signal.
  • the AC power source 508 may be commercial power with a voltage range of 100-277V and a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 500 receives the AC power signal provided by the AC power source 508 as an external driving signal, and is driven to emit light.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 500 is a driving structure of a single-ended power supply, and the lamp cap at the same end of the lamp tube has a first pin 501 and a second pin 502 for receiving an external driving signal.
  • the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 in this embodiment are used for receiving external driving signals; in other words, when the LED straight tube light is installed on the lamp socket, the power module (not shown) in the LED straight tube light 500
  • the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are coupled (ie, electrically connected, or directly or indirectly connected) to the AC power source 508 to receive the AC power signal.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 500 of the present application can also be applied to the circuit structure of double-ended single-pin and the circuit structure of double-ended double-pin.
  • the circuit structure of the double-ended single-pin is shown in FIG. 8B , which is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 of the present embodiment are respectively placed on the opposite double-ended lamp caps of the lamp tube of the LED straight tube lamp 500 to receive external driving signals from both ends of the lamp tube.
  • the rest of the circuit connections and functions are the same as the circuit shown in Figure 8A.
  • FIGS. 8C to 8E are schematic circuit diagrams of the LED straight tube lamp lighting systems according to the third to fifth embodiments of the present application.
  • the present embodiment further includes a third pin 503 and a fourth pin 504.
  • One end of the lamp holder has a first pin 501 and a third pin 503
  • the other end of the lamp holder has a second pin 502 and a fourth pin 504 .
  • the first pin 501 , the second pin 502 , the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 can be used to receive external driving signals to drive the LED components (not shown) in the LED straight tube lamp 500 to emit light.
  • the power supply of the lamp can be realized by adjusting the configuration of the power module.
  • the power-in mode of double-ended single-pin that is, the external driving signals of different polarities are respectively given to the pins of the lamp caps at both ends, or it can be regarded as the live wire and the neutral wire of the AC power supply 508 are respectively coupled connected to the pins of the lamp caps at both ends
  • the power-in mode of double-ended single-pin that is, the external driving signals of different polarities are respectively given to the pins of the lamp caps at both ends, or it can be regarded as the live wire and the neutral wire of the AC power supply 508 are respectively coupled connected to the pins of the lamp caps at both ends
  • each of the two-end lamp caps may have one pin that is free/floating, such as the third pin 503 and the first pin in FIG. 8D .
  • the four pins 504 can be in an empty/floating state, so that the lamp can receive an external driving signal through the first pin 501 and the second pin 502, so that the power module inside the lamp can perform subsequent rectification and filtering operations .
  • the pins of the double-ended lamp cap can be short-circuited together by circuits outside the lamp tube or inside the lamp tube, for example, the first pin 501 and the third pin on the same side lamp cap.
  • the pins 503 are shorted together, and the second pin 502 and the fourth pin 504 on the same side of the lamp head are shorted together, so that the first pin 501 and the third pin 503 can also be used to receive positive or negative polarity
  • the second pin 502 and the fourth pin 504 are used to receive external driving signals of opposite polarities, so that the power module inside the lamp tube can perform subsequent rectification and filtering operations.
  • FIG. 9A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of the LED lamp in this embodiment is coupled to the LED module 50 and includes a rectifier circuit 510 (may be referred to as a first rectifier circuit 510 ), a filter circuit 520 and a drive circuit 530 .
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is coupled to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 to receive an external driving signal, rectify the external driving signal, and then output the rectified signal from the first rectification output terminal 511 and the second rectification output terminal 512 .
  • the external driving signal here can be the AC power signal provided by the AC power source 508 in FIGS.
  • the filter circuit 520 is coupled to the rectifier circuit 510 to filter the rectified signal; that is, the filter circuit 520 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and the second rectifier output end 512 to receive the rectified signal, and to rectify the rectified signal.
  • the signal is filtered, and then the filtered signal is output from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 .
  • the driving circuit 530 is coupled to the filtering circuit 520 and the LED module 50 to receive the filtered signal and generate a driving signal to drive the LED module 50 at the back end to emit light.
  • the filtered signal is converted into a driving signal and output through the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532; that is, the driving circuit 530 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to receive the filtered signal. , and then drive the LED components (not shown) in the LED module 50 to emit light.
  • the LED module 50 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to receive driving signals to emit light.
  • the current of the LED module 50 is stable at a predetermined current value.
  • FIGS. 10A to 10I For the specific configuration of the LED module 50, reference may be made to the subsequent descriptions of FIGS. 10A to 10I .
  • FIG. 9B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of the LED lamp in this embodiment is coupled to the LED module 50 and includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and a rectifier circuit 540 (may be referred to as a second rectifier circuit 540), which can be applied to FIG. 8C
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is coupled to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 for receiving and rectifying the external driving signal transmitted by the first pin 501 and the second pin 502; the second rectifier circuit 540 is coupled to the third pin
  • the pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 are used for receiving and rectifying the external driving signal transmitted by the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 .
  • the power supply module 5 of the LED lamp may include the first rectification circuit 510 and the second rectification circuit 540 to jointly output the rectified signal at the first rectification output end 511 and the second rectification output end 512 .
  • the filter circuit 520 is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 to receive the rectified signal, filter the rectified signal, and then output the filtered signal from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522.
  • the driving circuit 530 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to receive the filtered signal, and then drive the LED components (not shown) in the LED module 50 to emit light.
  • FIG. 9C is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module of the LED lamp mainly includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 and a drive circuit 530 , which can also be applied to the single-ended power supply architecture of FIG. 8A or 8C or the double-ended power supply architecture of FIGS. 8B , 8D or 8E.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 may have three input terminals to be respectively coupled to the first pin 501 , the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 , and can be used for each pin
  • the signals received by 501 to 503 are rectified, wherein the fourth pin 504 can be floated or short-circuited with the third pin 503, so the configuration of the second rectifier circuit 540 can be omitted in this embodiment.
  • the operation of the rest of the circuits is substantially the same as that of FIG. 9B , so the detailed description is not repeated here.
  • the number of the first rectifier output end 511 , the second rectifier output end 512 , the first filter output end 521 , and the second filter output end 522 are all two.
  • the requirements for signal transmission among the circuits of the rectifier circuit 510 , the filter circuit 520 , the driving circuit 530 and the LED module 50 increase or decrease, that is, there may be one or more coupling terminals among the circuits.
  • the power module of the LED straight tube lamp shown in FIG. 9A to FIG. 9C and the following embodiments of the power module of the LED straight tube lamp are applicable to the LED straight tube lamp shown in FIG. 8A to FIG. 8E .
  • the light-emitting circuit structure that the legs are used to transmit power such as: bulb lamps, PAL lamps, intubation energy-saving lamps (PLS lamps, PLD lamps, PLT lamps, PLL lamps, etc.) .
  • Embodiments for Bulb Lamps This embodiment can be used together with the structural implementations of CN105465630A or CN105465663.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 500 of the present application When the LED straight tube lamp 500 of the present application is applied to a power-on structure with at least one pin at both ends, it can be retrofitted and then installed in a lamp drive circuit or a ballast 505 (such as an electronic ballast or an inductive ballast).
  • a ballast 505 such as an electronic ballast or an inductive ballast.
  • the lamp holder is suitable for bypassing the ballast 505 and being powered by an AC power source 508 (eg, commercial power).
  • FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the positive terminal of the LED module 50 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531
  • the negative terminal is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the LED module 50 includes at least one LED unit 632 . When there are two or more LED units 632, they are connected in parallel with each other.
  • the positive terminal of each LED unit is coupled to the positive terminal of the LED module 50 to be coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 ; the negative terminal of each LED unit is coupled to the negative terminal of the LED module 50 to be coupled to the second driving output terminal 532.
  • the LED unit 632 includes at least one LED component 631 , ie, the LED light source 202 in the aforementioned embodiments.
  • the LED components 631 are connected in series in a series, the positive terminal of the first LED component 631 is coupled to the positive terminal of the LED unit 632 to which it belongs, and the negative terminal of the first LED component 631 is coupled to the next (the second LED component 631).
  • the positive terminal of the last LED component 631 is coupled to the negative terminal of the previous LED component 631 , and the negative terminal of the last LED component 631 is coupled to the negative terminal of the LED unit 632 to which it belongs.
  • the current detection signal marked as S531 represents the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 , which can be used for detecting and controlling the LED module 50 .
  • FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the positive terminal of the LED module 50 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531
  • the negative terminal is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the LED module 50 of this embodiment includes at least two LED units 732 , and the positive terminal of each LED unit 732 is coupled to the positive terminal of the LED module 50 , and the negative terminal is coupled to the negative terminal of the LED module 50 .
  • the LED unit 732 includes at least two LED components 731.
  • the LED components 731 in the corresponding LED unit 732 are connected as described in FIG. 10A.
  • the negative pole of the LED component 731 is coupled to the positive pole of the next LED component 731, and the first The positive electrode of one LED component 731 is coupled to the positive electrode of the associated LED unit 732 , and the negative electrode of the last LED component 731 is coupled to the negative electrode of the associated LED unit 732 . Furthermore, the LED units 732 in this embodiment are also connected to each other. The positive electrodes of the n-th LED components 731 of each LED unit 732 are connected to each other, and the negative electrodes are also connected to each other. Therefore, the connection between the LED components of the LED module 50 of this embodiment is a mesh connection.
  • the current detection signal S531 of the present embodiment can also represent the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 , and is used for detecting and controlling the LED module 50 .
  • the number of the LED components 731 included in the LED unit 732 is preferably 15-25, more preferably 18-22.
  • FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram of wiring of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the connection relationship of the LED assembly 831 in this embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 10B , and three LED units are used as an example for description here.
  • the positive lead 834 and the negative lead 835 receive driving signals to provide power to each LED element 831 .
  • the positive lead 834 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 of the aforementioned filter circuit 520
  • the negative lead 835 is coupled to the aforementioned filter circuit 520 A second filtered output 522 to receive the filtered signal.
  • the nth of each LED unit is divided into the same LED group 832 in the figure.
  • the positive lead 834 is connected to the first LED assembly 831 in the leftmost three LED units, that is, the (left) positive poles of the three LED assemblies in the leftmost LED group 832 as shown in the figure, and the negative lead 835 is connected to the three LEDs.
  • the last LED assembly 831 in each LED unit ie the (right) negative pole of the three LED assemblies in the rightmost LED group 832 as shown in the figure.
  • the negative pole of the first LED component 831 of each LED unit, the positive pole of the last LED component 831 , and the positive poles and negative poles of other LED components 831 are connected through connecting wires 839 .
  • the anodes of the three LED assemblies 831 of the leftmost LED group 832 are connected to each other through the anode wire 834 , and the anodes thereof are connected to each other through the leftmost connecting wire 839 .
  • the positive poles of the three LED components 831 of the second left LED group 832 are connected to each other through the leftmost connecting wire 839 , and the negative poles thereof are connected to each other through the second left connecting wire 839 .
  • the width 836 of the connecting wire 839 connected to the positive electrode of the LED assembly 831 is smaller than the width 837 of the negative electrode connecting portion of the LED assembly 831 .
  • the area of the negative electrode connection portion is made larger than the area of the positive electrode connection portion.
  • the width 837 is smaller than the width 838 of the portion of the connecting wire 839 that is simultaneously connected to the positive electrode of one of the two LED components 831 and the negative electrode of the other, so that the area of the portion connected to the positive electrode and the negative electrode at the same time is larger than that of the portion connected to only the negative electrode. area and the area of the positive connection part. Therefore, such a trace structure helps to dissipate heat from the LED components.
  • the positive lead 834 may further include a positive lead 834a
  • the negative lead 835 may further include a negative lead 835a, so that both ends of the LED module have positive and negative connection points.
  • Such a wiring structure enables other circuits of the power module of the LED lamp, such as the filter circuit 520, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second rectifier circuit 540, to be coupled to the LED module through the positive and negative connection points at either or both ends. , to increase the flexibility of the configuration arrangement of the actual circuit.
  • FIG. 10D is a schematic diagram of wiring of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the connection relationship of the LED components 931 in this embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 10A , and the description is given by taking three LED units and each LED unit including 7 LED components as an example.
  • the positive lead 934 and the negative lead 935 receive driving signals to provide power to each LED element 931 .
  • the positive lead 934 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 of the filter circuit 520
  • the negative lead 935 is coupled to the filter circuit 520 A second filtered output 522 to receive the filtered signal.
  • the seven LED components in each LED unit are divided into the same LED group 932 .
  • Anode lead 934 connects the (left) anode of the first (leftmost) LED assembly 931 in each LED group 932.
  • Negative lead 935 connects the (right) negative of the last (rightmost) LED assembly 931 in each LED group 932.
  • the negative pole of the left LED component 931 adjacent to the two LED components 931 is connected to the positive pole of the right LED component 931 through the connecting wire 939 .
  • the LED components of the LED group 932 are connected in series to form a string.
  • the connecting wire 939 is used to connect the negative electrode of one of the two adjacent LED components 931 and the positive electrode of the other.
  • the negative lead 935 is used to connect the negative pole of the last (rightmost) LED assembly 931 of each LED group.
  • the anode lead 934 is used to connect the anode of the first (leftmost) LED assembly 931 of each LED group. Therefore, the width and the heat dissipation area of the LED components are in descending order according to the above order. That is to say, the width 938 of the connecting wire 939 is the largest, the width 937 of the negative wire 935 connecting the negative electrode of the LED component 931 is next, and the width 936 of the positive wire 934 connecting the positive electrode of the LED component 931 is the smallest. Therefore, such a trace structure helps to dissipate heat from the LED components.
  • the positive lead 934 may further include a positive lead 934a
  • the negative lead 935 may further include a negative lead 935a, so that both ends of the LED module have positive and negative connection points.
  • Such a wiring structure enables other circuits of the power module of the LED lamp, such as the filter circuit 520, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second rectifier circuit 540, to be coupled to the LED module through the positive and negative connection points at either or both ends. , to increase the flexibility of the configuration arrangement of the actual circuit.
  • the traces shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D can be implemented with a flexible circuit board.
  • the flexible circuit board has a single-layer circuit layer, and the positive lead 834, the positive lead 834a, the negative lead 835, the negative lead 835a and the connection lead 839 in FIG. 10C are formed by etching, and the positive lead in FIG. 10D is formed 934 , the positive lead 934a, the negative lead 935, the negative lead 935a, and the connecting lead 939.
  • FIG. 10E is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the connection relationship of the LED assembly 1031 of this embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 10B .
  • the configuration of the positive electrode lead and the negative electrode lead (not shown) and the connection relationship with other circuits in this embodiment are substantially the same as those shown in FIG. 10C , and the difference between the two is that the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the arrangement of the LED components 831 (that is, the positive electrodes and negative electrodes of each LED component 831 are arranged along the extending direction of the wires) is changed to the vertical arrangement of the LED components 1031 (that is, the connection direction of the positive electrodes and the negative electrodes of the LED components 1031 and the wires are arranged in the vertical direction).
  • the extending direction is vertical), and the arrangement of the connecting wires 1039 is adjusted correspondingly based on the arrangement direction of the LED components 1031 .
  • the connecting wire 1039_2 includes a first long side portion with a narrow width 1037 , a second long side portion with a wider width 1038 , and a turning portion connecting the two long side portions.
  • the connecting wire 1039_2 can be set in a right-angled z-shape, that is, the connection between each long side portion and the turning portion is at a right angle.
  • the first long side portion of the connecting wire 1039_2 is correspondingly arranged with the second long side portion of the adjacent connecting wire 1039_3; similarly, the second long side portion of the connecting wire 1039_2 is corresponding to the first long side portion of the adjacent connecting wire 1039_1 The corresponding configuration of the edge.
  • the connecting wires 1039 are arranged in the extending direction of the extended sides, and the first long side of each connecting wire 1039 is arranged corresponding to the second long side of the adjacent connecting wire 1039;
  • the second long sides of the connecting wires 1039 are arranged correspondingly with the first long sides of the adjacent connecting wires 1039 , so that the connecting wires 1039 as a whole are configured to have a uniform width.
  • the relative configuration of the LED components 1031 and the connecting wires 1039 is also described with the connecting wires 1039_2.
  • the anodes of some LED components 1031 (for example, the four LED components 1031 on the right side) are connected to the connecting wires.
  • the first long side of 1039_2 is connected to each other through the first long side; and the negative electrode of this part of the LED components 1031 is connected to the second long side of the adjacent connecting wire 1039_3 and is connected to each other through the second long side. connected to each other.
  • the positive poles of another part of the LED components 1031 are connected to the first long side of the connecting wire 1039_1, and the negative poles are connected to the second long side of the connecting wire 1039_2.
  • the positive electrodes of the four LED components 1031 on the left are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_1, and the negative electrodes thereof are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_2.
  • the positive electrodes of the four LED components 831 on the right are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_2, and the negative electrodes thereof are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_3.
  • the four LED components 1031 on the left can be simulated as the first LED components of the four LED units in the LED module
  • the four LED components 1031 on the right can simulate the LED as the second LED component of the four LED units in the LED module, and so on to form a mesh connection as shown in FIG. 10B .
  • the LED components 1031 are changed to a vertical configuration in this embodiment, which can increase the gap between the LED components 1031 and widen the wiring of the connecting wires, thereby avoiding the need for light
  • the width 1037 of the first long side portion of the positive electrode connection portion smaller than the width 1038 of the second long side portion of the negative electrode connection portion, the area of the LED element 1031 at the negative electrode connection portion can be made larger than that of the positive electrode connection portion. part of the area. Therefore, such a trace structure helps to dissipate heat from the LED components.
  • FIG. 10F is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is substantially the same as the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 10E , and the difference between the two is only that the connecting wires 1139 of this embodiment are implemented by non-right-angle Z-shaped wires.
  • the turning portion forms an oblique wiring, so that the connection between each long side portion of the connecting wire 1139 and the turning portion is a non-right angle.
  • the way of arranging the connecting wires obliquely in this embodiment can Avoid problems such as displacement and offset of LED components due to uneven pads during LED component placement.
  • the connecting wire 1139 of this embodiment can also be configured such that the width 1137 of the long side of the connecting portion of the positive electrode is smaller than the width 1138 of the long side of the connecting portion with the negative electrode, thereby achieving the effect of improving heat dissipation.
  • the vertical wiring (as shown in Figures 10C to 10E) will produce regular white oil depressions at the turns of the wires, so that the connecting wires are The tin on the LED component pads is relatively in a raised position. Since the surface where the tin is applied is not a flat surface, when the LED components are mounted, the uneven surface may prevent the LED components from being attached to the predetermined position. Therefore, in this embodiment, by adjusting the vertical wiring to the oblique wiring configuration, the copper foil strength of the entire wiring can be made uniform, and no protrusion or unevenness occurs in a specific position, thereby making the LED components 1131 can be attached to the wire more easily, improving the reliability of the lamp assembly. In addition, since each LED unit in this embodiment only travels the diagonal substrate once on the lamp board, the strength of the whole lamp board can be greatly improved, thereby preventing the lamp board from bending and shortening the length of the lamp board.
  • copper foil can also be covered around the pads of the LED components 1131 to offset the offset of the LED components 1131 during mounting and avoid short circuits caused by solder balls.
  • FIG. 10G is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 10C , and the difference between the two is mainly that the wiring at the corresponding position between the connecting wire 1239 and the connecting wire 1239 in this embodiment (not at the pad of the LED component 1231 ) is changed to be inclined. Traces.
  • the strength of the copper foil of the whole wiring can be made uniform, and there will be no protrusion or unevenness in a specific position, so that the LED components 1131 It can be attached to the wire more easily, which improves the reliability of the lamp assembly.
  • the color temperature point CTP can also be uniformly set between the LED components 1231 , as shown in FIG. 10H , which is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application .
  • FIG. 10H is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application .
  • the color temperature point CTP at the corresponding position on each wire 1234 and 1239 can be on the same line. In this way, when tinning, the entire LED module can be covered with only a few tapes (as shown in the figure, if each wire is set with 3 color temperature points, only 3 tapes are needed) to cover all the LED modules. Color temperature point to improve the smoothness of the assembly process and save assembly time.
  • FIG. 10I is a schematic diagram of wiring of the LED module according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the wiring of the LED module shown in FIG. 10C is changed from a single-layer circuit layer to a double-layer circuit layer, mainly by changing the positive lead 834a and the negative lead 835a to the second circuit layer. described as follows.
  • the flexible circuit board has double-layer circuit layers, including a first circuit layer 2a, a dielectric layer 2b and a second circuit layer 2c.
  • the first wiring layer 2a and the second wiring layer 2c are electrically isolated by a dielectric layer 2b.
  • a positive wire 834, a negative wire 835 and a connecting wire 839 in FIG. 10I are formed on the first circuit layer 2a of the flexible circuit board by etching, so as to electrically connect the plurality of LED components 831, for example, electrically connect the plurality of LED components 831.
  • the LED components are formed into a mesh-connected LED group 832, and the positive lead 834a and the negative lead 835a of the second circuit layer 2c are etched to electrically connect (the filter output end of) the filter circuit.
  • the positive lead 834 and the negative lead 835 of the first circuit layer 2a of the flexible circuit board have layer connection points 834b and 835b.
  • the positive lead 834a and the negative lead 835a of the second wiring layer 2c have layer connection points 834c and 835c.
  • the layer connection points 834b and 835b are located opposite to the layer connection points 834c and 835c for electrically connecting the positive electrode lead 834 and the positive electrode lead 834a, and the negative electrode lead 835 and the negative electrode lead 835a.
  • connection points 834c and 835c of the exposed layer at the positions of the layer connection points 834b and 835b of the first layer of the circuit layer with the lower current borrowing layer, and then solder them with solder to make the positive electrode lead 834 and the positive electrode lead.
  • 834a, and the negative lead 835 and the negative lead 835a are electrically connected to each other.
  • the positive lead 934a and the negative lead 935a can also be changed to the second wiring layer to form a wiring structure of double wiring layers.
  • the thickness of the second conductive layer of the flexible circuit board with double-layer conductive layers or circuit layers is preferably thicker than that of the first conductive layer, so as to reduce the thickness of the positive electrode lead and the negative electrode lead. Line loss (voltage drop) on .
  • the flexible circuit board with double-layer conductive layer can reduce the size of the flexible circuit board because the positive lead and negative lead at both ends are moved to the second layer. width.
  • narrower substrates have more discharges than wider substrates, thus improving the production efficiency of LED modules.
  • the flexible circuit board with the double-layer conductive layer is relatively easy to maintain the shape, so as to increase the reliability of production, for example, the accuracy of the welding position during the welding of LED components.
  • the present application also provides an LED straight tube lamp, at least part of the electronic components of the power module of the LED straight tube lamp are arranged on the lamp board: that is, using PEC (Printed Electronic Circuits, PEC: Printed Electronic Circuits) , the technology prints or embeds at least some of the electronic components on the light board.
  • PEC Printed Electronic Circuits
  • PEC Printed Electronic Circuits
  • all the electronic components of the power module are arranged on the light board.
  • the production process is as follows: substrate preparation (flexible printed circuit board preparation) ⁇ printing metal nano-ink ⁇ printing passive components/active devices (power modules) ⁇ drying / sintering ⁇ printing interlayer connection bumps ⁇ Spraying insulating ink ⁇ spraying metal nano ink ⁇ spraying passive components and active devices (and so on to form the included multi-layer board) ⁇ spraying surface welding pad ⁇ spraying solder resist to weld LED components.
  • the power modules are arranged at both ends of the light board, so as to minimize the influence of the heat generated by its operation on the LED components. In this embodiment, the overall reliability of the power module is improved due to the reduction of welding.
  • the electronic components of the power module can also be arranged on the lamp board by means of embedding. That is, the electronic components are embedded in the flexible lamp board in an embedded manner.
  • it can be realized by methods such as resistive/capacitive copper clad laminates (CCL) or inks related to screen printing; or by using inkjet printing technology to realize the method of embedding passive components, that is, using inkjet printers.
  • CCL resistive/capacitive copper clad laminates
  • inks related to screen printing or by using inkjet printing technology to realize the method of embedding passive components, that is, using inkjet printers.
  • the electronic components embedded in the light panel include resistors, capacitors and inductors; in other embodiments, active components are also suitable.
  • the power supply module is reasonably arranged to optimize the design of the lamp head (due to the partial use of embedded resistors and capacitors, this embodiment saves valuable printed circuit board surface space, reduces the size of the printed circuit board and reduces its Weight and thickness.
  • the reliability of the power module is also improved by eliminating the solder joints of these resistors and capacitors (the solder joints are the most prone to failure on the printed circuit board).
  • the wires on the printed circuit board will be shortened. length and allow for a more compact device layout, thus improving electrical performance).
  • the method of embedded capacitance is usually used, using a concept called distributed capacitance or planar capacitance.
  • a very thin insulating layer is pressed on top of the copper layer. Usually in the form of power plane / ground plane pair. The very thin insulating layer keeps the distance between the power plane and the ground plane very small.
  • Such capacitance can also be achieved with conventional metallized holes. Basically, this method creates a large parallel plate capacitor on the board.
  • Some high-capacitance products some are distributed capacitive type, others are discrete embedded. Higher capacitance is achieved by filling the insulating layer with barium titanate, a material with a high dielectric constant.
  • resistor adhesives It is a resin doped with conductive carbon or graphite as a filler, screen-printed to the desired location, then processed and laminated into the interior of the circuit board. Resistors are connected to other electronic components on the circuit board by metallized holes or microvias.
  • Another method is the Ohmega-Ply method: it is a bimetallic layer structure - the copper layer and a thin nickel alloy layer make up the resistor elements, which form a layered resistor relative to the bottom layer.
  • Various nickel resistors with copper terminals are then formed by etching the copper and nickel alloy layers. These resistors are laminated into the inner layers of the circuit board.
  • the wires are directly printed on the inner wall of the glass tube (arranged in a line shape), and the LED components are directly attached to the inner wall, so as to be electrically connected to each other through the wires.
  • the chip form of the LED component is directly attached to the wire of the inner wall (connecting points are set at both ends of the wire, and the LED component is connected to the power module through the connection point), and after the attachment, drop phosphor powder on the chip.
  • the LED straight tube light can produce white light when it works, and it can also be light of other colors).
  • the luminous efficiency of the LED assembly of the present application is 80lm/W or more, preferably 120lm/W or more, and more preferably 160lm/W or more.
  • the LED component can be a monochromatic LED chip whose light is mixed into white light by phosphor powder, and the main wavelengths of its spectrum are 430-460nm and 550-560nm, or 430-460nm, 540-560nm and 620-640nm.
  • connection mode of the LED module 50 in the embodiment of FIG. 10A to FIG. 10I is not limited to the implementation of the straight tube lamp, but can be applied to various types of LED lamps powered by AC power (ie, no Ballast LED lamps), such as LED bulbs, LED filament lamps or integrated LED lamps, the application is not limited to this.
  • the electronic components of the power module may be provided on the lamp board or on a circuit board within the lamp head.
  • some of the capacitors in the embodiment adopt chip capacitors (eg ceramic chip capacitors), which are arranged on the lamp board or the circuit board in the lamp holder.
  • the chip capacitors set in this way will emit obvious noise due to the piezoelectric effect during use, which affects the comfort of customers.
  • a suitable hole or slot can be drilled directly under the chip capacitor, which can change the composition of the chip capacitor and the circuit board carrying the chip capacitor under the piezoelectric effect Vibration system so as to significantly reduce the noise emitted.
  • the edge or perimeter of this hole or slot can be approximately circular, oval or rectangular in shape, for example, and is located in the conductive layer in the lamp board or in the circuit board in the lamp cap, below the chip capacitor.
  • FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the rectifier circuit 610 is a bridge rectifier circuit, including a first rectifier diode 611 , a second rectifier diode 612 , a third rectifier diode 613 and a fourth rectifier diode 614 for full-wave rectification of the received signal.
  • the anode of the first rectifier diode 611 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512
  • the cathode is coupled to the second pin 502 .
  • the anode of the second rectifier diode 612 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the first pin 501 .
  • the anode of the third rectifier diode 613 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the anode of the rectifier diode 614 is coupled to the first pin 501 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the operation of the rectifier circuit 610 is described as follows.
  • the AC signal is in the positive half-wave, the AC signal flows through the first pin 501, the rectifier diode 614 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512, the first rectifier diode 611 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence.
  • the second pin 502 flows out afterward.
  • the AC signal When the AC signal is in the negative half-wave, the AC signal flows through the second pin 502, the third rectifier diode 613 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the second rectifier diode in sequence 612 and pin 501 flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal of the rectification circuit 610 is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 . According to the above operation description, the rectified signal output by the rectification circuit 610 is a full-wave rectified signal.
  • the operation of the rectifier circuit 610 is described as follows.
  • the DC signal passes through the first pin 501 , the rectifier diode 614 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence. flows in, and flows out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the first rectifier diode 611 and the second pin 502 in sequence.
  • the AC signal passes through the second pin 502, the third rectifier diode 613 and the first rectifier output terminal in sequence 511 flows in, and flows out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the second rectifier diode 612 and the first pin 501 in sequence.
  • the positive pole of the rectified signal of the rectifier circuit 610 is located at the first rectification output terminal 511
  • the negative pole is located at the second rectified output terminal 512 .
  • the rectifying circuit 610 in this embodiment can correctly output the rectified signal regardless of whether the received signal is an AC signal or a DC signal.
  • FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the rectifier circuit 710 includes a first rectifier diode 711 and a second rectifier diode 712 for half-wave rectification of the received signal.
  • the anode of the first rectifier diode 711 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the anode of the second rectifier diode 712 is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 , and the cathode is coupled to the first pin 501 .
  • the second rectified output terminal 512 may be omitted or grounded according to practical applications.
  • the signal level of the AC signal input at the first pin 501 is higher than the signal level input at the second pin 502 .
  • both the first rectifier diode 711 and the second rectifier diode 712 are in a reverse-biased off state, and the rectifier circuit 710 stops outputting the rectified signal.
  • the signal level of the AC signal input at the first pin 501 is lower than the signal level input at the second pin 502 .
  • the first rectifier diode 711 and the second rectifier diode 712 are both in the forward-biased conduction state, and the AC signal flows in through the first rectifier diode 711 and the first rectifier output terminal 511, and is transmitted by the second rectifier output terminal 512 or the first rectifier output terminal 511. Another circuit or ground of the LED light flows out.
  • the rectified signal output by the rectification circuit 710 is a half-wave rectified signal.
  • circuit 540 when the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 of the rectifier circuit shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B are changed to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504, they can be used as the second rectifier shown in FIG. 9B .
  • circuit 540 More specifically, in an exemplary embodiment, when the full-wave/full-bridge rectifier circuit 610 shown in FIG. 11A is applied to the double-terminal input lamp of FIG. 9B , the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second rectifier circuit 540 The configuration can be shown in Figure 11C.
  • FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the structure of the rectifier circuit 840 is the same as that of the rectifier circuit 810, and both are bridge rectifier circuits.
  • the rectifier circuit 810 includes the first to fourth rectifier diodes 611-614, the configurations of which are as described in the foregoing embodiment of FIG. 11A .
  • the rectifier circuit 840 includes a fifth rectifier diode 641 , a sixth rectifier diode 642 , a seventh rectifier diode 643 and an eighth rectifier diode 644 for full-wave rectification of the received signal.
  • the anode of the fifth rectifier diode 641 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the fourth pin 504 .
  • the anode of the sixth rectifier diode 642 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the third pin 503 .
  • the anode of the seventh rectifier diode 643 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the anode of the rectifier diode 614 is coupled to the third pin 503 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the rectifier circuits 840 and 810 have corresponding configurations, and the only difference between the two is that the input end of the rectifier circuit 810 (here can be compared to the first rectifier circuit 510 in FIG. 9B ) is coupled to the first pin 501 With the second pin 502 , the input end of the rectifier circuit 840 (here can be compared to the second rectifier circuit 540 in FIG. 9B ) is coupled to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 .
  • the present embodiment adopts the structure of two full-wave rectifier circuits to realize the circuit structure of double terminals and double pins.
  • the rectifier circuit of the embodiment of FIG. 10C although it is implemented in the configuration of double-ended double-pin, in addition to the power supply mode of double-ended double-pin feeding, whether it is single-ended feeding or
  • the power supply mode of the double-ended single-pin can be used to supply power to the LED straight tube lamp through the circuit structure of this embodiment.
  • the specific operation instructions are as follows:
  • the external driving signal can be applied to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 , or applied to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 .
  • the rectifier circuit 810 will perform full-wave rectification on the external driving signal according to the operation method described in the embodiment of FIG. 9A, while the rectifier circuit 840 will not operate.
  • the rectifier circuit 840 will perform full-wave rectification on the external drive signal according to the operation method described in the embodiment of FIG. 9A, and the rectifier circuit 810 will not work.
  • the external driving signal can be applied to the first pin 501 and the fourth pin 504 , or applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 .
  • the external driving signal is applied to the first pin 501 and the fourth pin 504 and the external driving signal is an AC signal
  • the AC signal passes through the first pin 501 and the fourth pin in sequence.
  • the rectifier diode 614 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 flow in and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the fifth rectifier diode 641 and the fourth pin 504 in sequence.
  • the AC signal flows through the fourth pin 504 , the seventh rectifier diode 643 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence.
  • the diode 612 and the first pin 501 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the anode of the rectified signal is located at the first rectified output end 511 , and the negative electrode is located at the second rectified output end 512 .
  • the second rectifier diode 612 and the fourth rectifier diode 614 in the rectifier circuit 810 cooperate with the fifth rectifier diode 641 and the seventh rectifier diode 643 in the rectifier circuit 840 to perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectifier The rear signal is a full-wave rectified signal.
  • the external driving signal is applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 and the external driving signal is an AC signal
  • the AC signal passes through the third pin in sequence.
  • the eighth rectifier diode 644 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 then flow in, and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the first rectifier diode 611 and the second pin 502 in sequence.
  • the AC signal flows through the second pin 502 , the third rectifier diode 613 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then passes through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the sixth rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence.
  • the diode 642 and the third pin 503 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 .
  • the first rectifier diode 611 and the third rectifier diode 613 in the rectifier circuit 810 cooperate with the sixth rectifier diode 642 and the eighth rectifier diode 644 in the rectifier circuit 840 to perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectifier The rear signal is a full-wave rectified signal.
  • the individual operations of the rectifier circuits 810 and 840 can be referred to the description of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 11A , which will not be repeated here.
  • the rectified signals generated by the rectification circuits 810 and 840 are superimposed on the first rectified output terminal 511 and the second rectified output terminal 512 and then output to the back-end circuit.
  • the configuration of the rectifier circuit 510 may be as shown in FIG. 11D .
  • FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the rectifier circuit 910 includes first to fourth rectifier diodes 911-914, the configurations of which are as described in the foregoing embodiment of FIG. 11A.
  • the rectifier circuit 910 further includes a fifth rectifier diode 915 and a sixth rectifier diode 916 .
  • the anode of the fifth rectifier diode 915 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512
  • the cathode is coupled to the third pin 503 .
  • the anode of the sixth rectifier diode 916 is coupled to the third pin 503 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the fourth pin 504 is in a floating state here.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 of this embodiment can be regarded as a rectifier circuit having three groups of bridge arm units, and each group of bridge arm units can provide an input signal receiving end.
  • the first rectifier diode 911 and the third rectifier diode 913 form the first bridge arm unit, which correspondingly receives the signal on the second pin 502;
  • the second rectifier diode 912 and the fourth rectifier diode 914 form the second bridge arm
  • the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 form a third bridge arm unit corresponding to receive the signal on the third pin 503 .
  • full-wave rectification can be performed.
  • the power supply modes of single-ended power feeding, double-ended single-pin power feeding, and double-ended double-pin power feeding are also compatible.
  • the specific operation instructions are as follows:
  • the external driving signal is applied to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502.
  • the operations of the first to fourth rectifier diodes 911-914 are as described in the embodiment of FIG. 11A.
  • the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 do not operate.
  • the external driving signal can be applied to the first pin 501 and the third pin 503 , or applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 .
  • the external driving signal is applied to the first pin 501 and the third pin 503 and the external driving signal is an AC signal
  • the AC signal passes through the first pin 501 and the fourth pin in sequence.
  • the rectifier diode 914 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 flow in and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the third pin 503 in sequence.
  • the AC signal flows through the third pin 503 , the sixth rectifier diode 916 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence.
  • the diode 912 and the first pin 501 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 .
  • the second rectifier diode 912 , the fourth rectifier diode 914 , the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 in the rectifier circuit 910 perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectified signal is full-wave rectified signal.
  • the external driving signal is applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 and the external driving signal is an AC signal
  • the AC signal passes through the third pin in sequence. 503 , the sixth rectifier diode 916 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 then flow in, and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the first rectifier diode 911 and the second pin 502 in sequence.
  • the AC signal is in the negative half-wave period, the AC signal flows through the second pin 502 , the third rectifier diode 913 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then passes through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the fifth rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence.
  • the diode 915 and the third pin 503 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 .
  • the first rectifier diode 911 , the third rectifier diode 913 , the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 in the rectifier circuit 910 perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectified signal is full-wave rectified signal.
  • the operations of the first to fourth rectifier diodes 911 - 914 can be referred to the description of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 11A , which will not be repeated here.
  • the signal polarity of the third pin 503 is the same as that of the first pin 501
  • the operation of the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 is similar to that of the second rectifier diode 912 and the fourth rectifier diode 914 (ie, first bridge arm unit).
  • the operation of the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 is similar to that of the first rectifier diode 911 and the third rectifier diode 913 ( That is, the second bridge arm unit).
  • FIG. 11E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11E is substantially the same as FIG. 11D , the difference between the two is that the input end of the first rectifier circuit 910 in FIG. 11E is further coupled to the terminal conversion circuit 941 .
  • the endpoint conversion circuit 941 of this embodiment includes fuses 947 and 948 .
  • One end of the fuse 947 is coupled to the first pin 501 , and the other end is coupled to the common node of the second rectifier diode 912 and the fourth rectifier diode 914 (ie, the input end of the first bridge arm unit).
  • One end of the fuse 948 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the other end is coupled to the common node of the first rectifier diode 911 and the third rectifier diode 913 (ie, the input end of the second bridge arm unit). Therefore, when the current flowing through any one of the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 is higher than the rated current of the fuses 947 and 948, the fuses 947 and 948 will be blown and open accordingly, thereby achieving the overcurrent protection. Function.
  • the rectifier circuit of this embodiment can continue to be based on the dual It continues to operate in the power supply mode of a single pin.
  • FIG. 11F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11F is substantially the same as FIG. 11D , the difference between the two is that the two pins 503 and 504 in FIG. 11F are connected together by thin wires 917 .
  • the rectifier circuit of this embodiment is all the same. Works normally.
  • the thin wire 917 of this embodiment can be reliably blown. Therefore, when the lamp tube is inserted into the correct lamp socket, the The straight tube lamp of this rectification circuit can still maintain normal rectification work.
  • the rectifier circuits of the embodiments of FIGS. 11C to 11F can be compatible with the scenarios of single-ended power feeding, double-ended single-pin power feeding, and double-ended double-pin power feeding, thereby improving the compatibility of the application environment of the overall LED straight tube lamp. sex.
  • the circuit configuration inside the lamp tube in the embodiment of FIGS. 11D to 11F only needs to set three pads to connect to the corresponding lamp head pins. Enhancement has a significant contribution.
  • FIG. 12A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the filter circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the drawing of the first rectifier circuit 510 is only used to represent the connection relationship, and the filter circuit 520 does not include the first rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the filter circuit 520 includes a filter unit 523, which is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 to receive the rectified signal output by the rectification circuit, and to filter out the ripple in the rectified signal to output the filtered signal. . Therefore, the waveform of the filtered signal is smoother than that of the rectified signal.
  • the filter circuit 520 may further include a filter unit 524, which is coupled between the rectifier circuit and the corresponding pins, for example, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the first pin 501, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second pin 502, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the first pin 501, The two rectifier circuits 540 and the third pin 503 and the second rectifier circuit 540 and the fourth pin 504 are used to filter specific frequencies to filter out specific frequencies of the external driving signal.
  • the filter unit 524 is coupled between the first pin 501 and the first rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the filter circuit 520 may further include a filter unit 525, which is coupled between one of the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 and one of the diodes of the first rectifier circuit 510 or between the third pin 503 and the fourth connection.
  • a filter unit 525 is coupled between one of the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 and one of the diodes of the first rectifier circuit 510 or between the third pin 503 and the fourth connection.
  • One of the pins 504 and one of the diodes of the second rectifier circuit 540 are used for reducing or filtering electromagnetic interference (EMI).
  • the filter unit 525 is coupled between the first pin 501 and a diode (not shown) of one of the first rectifier circuits 510 .
  • the filter circuit 520 may further include a negative pressure elimination unit 526 .
  • the negative pressure eliminating unit 526 is coupled to the filtering unit 523, and is used for eliminating the negative pressure that may be generated when the filtering unit 523 resonates, so as to avoid damage to the chip or the controller in the driving circuit of the subsequent stage.
  • the filtering unit 523 itself is usually a circuit formed by a combination of resistance, capacitance or inductance, wherein due to the characteristics of capacitance and inductance, the filtering unit 523 exhibits a purely resistance property (ie, the resonance point) at a specific frequency. .
  • the signal received by the filtering unit 523 will be amplified and output, so the phenomenon of signal oscillation may be observed at the output end of the filtering unit 523 .
  • the oscillation amplitude is so large that the trough level is lower than the ground level, a negative pressure will be generated on the filter output terminals 521 and 522, and the negative pressure will be applied to the circuit of the subsequent stage and cause the risk of damage to the subsequent stage circuit.
  • the negative pressure eliminating unit 528 can conduct an energy release circuit when the negative pressure is generated, so that the reverse current caused by the negative pressure can be released through the energy release circuit and returned to the bus, thereby preventing the reverse current from flowing into the subsequent circuit.
  • filtering units 524 and 525 and the negative pressure removing unit 526 may be added or omitted according to actual application conditions, they are represented by dotted lines in the figure.
  • FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the filter unit 623 includes a capacitor 625 .
  • One end of the capacitor 625 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and the first filter output end 521 , and the other end is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512 and the second filter output end 522 , so that the first rectifier output end 511 and the second filter output end 522 are connected to each other.
  • the rectified signal output by the rectified output 512 is subjected to low-pass filtering to filter out high frequency components in the rectified signal to form a filtered signal, which is then output from the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 .
  • FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the filter unit 723 is a ⁇ -type filter circuit, and includes a capacitor 725 , an inductor 726 and a capacitor 727 .
  • One end of the capacitor 725 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and is coupled to the first filter output end 521 through the inductor 726 , and the other end is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512 and the second filter output end 522 .
  • the inductor 726 is coupled between the first rectifying output terminal 511 and the first filtering output terminal 521 .
  • One end of the capacitor 727 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and the first filter output end 521 through the inductor 726 , and the other end is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512 and the second filter output end 522 .
  • the filter unit 723 has more inductors 726 and capacitors 727 than the filter unit 623 shown in FIG. 12B . Also, like the capacitor 725, the inductor 726 and the capacitor 727 have low-pass filtering functions. Therefore, compared with the filtering unit 623 shown in FIG. 12B , the filtering unit 723 of this embodiment has better high-frequency filtering capability, and the waveform of the output filtered signal is smoother.
  • the filtering unit 723 may further include an inductor 728 , wherein the inductor 728 is connected in series between the second rectifying output terminal 512 and the second filtering output terminal 522 .
  • the inductance values of the inductors 726 and 728 in the above embodiment are preferably selected from the range of 10nH-10mH.
  • the capacitances of the capacitors 625, 725 and 727 are preferably selected from the range of 100pF-1uF.
  • FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 12C , the difference is that the filter unit 823 of this embodiment further includes a voltage control element BDs1 in addition to the inductor 826 and the capacitors 825 and 827 .
  • the voltage control element BDs1 is connected in parallel with the inductor 826, and is turned on or off in response to the voltage difference across the inductor 826, wherein the voltage control element BDs1 only has a voltage difference between the two ends of the inductor greater than a set value (this value is based on the voltage control element BDs1). determined by the component parameters) is turned on.
  • the voltage control component BDs1 can be instantly turned on in response to the instantaneous overvoltage to absorb the sudden increase to avoid the damage of the post-stage circuit caused by the surge current.
  • the voltage control device BDs1 is shown as a bidirectional trigger diode (or a discharge tube) as an example, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • the filtering unit 823 may also add an inductor (eg, the inductor 728 in FIG. 12C ) connected in series between the second rectifying output terminal 512 and the second filtering output terminal 522 .
  • the filter unit 823 may further include a voltage control element (not shown) arranged in parallel with the newly added inductor, so as to prevent the subsequent circuit from being damaged due to surge current.
  • the connection relationship between the added inductor and the voltage control component may refer to the connection relationship between the inductor 826 and the voltage control component BDs1.
  • FIG. 12E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 12D , the difference is that the filter unit 923 of this embodiment further includes a blocking element Ds1 in addition to the inductor 926 , capacitors 925 and 927 , and the voltage control element BDs1 .
  • the blocking component Ds1 and the voltage control component BDs1 are connected in series to limit the voltage control component BDs1, so that the voltage control component BDs1 can only be turned on in a specific state. Specifically, in the configuration where only the voltage control component BDs1 is provided (as shown in FIG.
  • the voltage of the first end (ie, the end connected to the first rectifier output end 511 ) of the inductor 826 is greater than that of the second end ( That is, the voltage at the end connected to the first filter output end 521 exceeds the set value (hereinafter referred to as the first state), or the voltage at the second end of the inductor 826 is greater than the voltage at the first end and exceeds the set value (hereinafter referred to as the first state) two states), will make the voltage control component BDs1 enter the conducting state.
  • the voltage control component BDs1 and the blocking component Ds1 are provided at the same time (as shown in FIG.
  • the current limiting component Ds1 when the first state occurs, the current limiting component Ds1 will be in a disconnected state, so that the voltage control component BDs1 and the current limiting component Ds1 The connected end is in a floating state (or regarded as being electrically separated from the second end of the inductor 926 ), so the voltage control component BDs1 cannot be turned on in response to the occurrence of the first state; when the second state occurs, the current limiting component Ds1 will be in a conducting state, so that the end connected to the voltage control component BDs1 and the current limiting component Ds1 is equivalent to being electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 926, so that the voltage control component BDs1 is turned on in response to the occurrence of the second state, To discharge/dissipate surge energy.
  • the current limiting component Ds1 may be implemented using a diode (described below as a diode Ds1 ).
  • the anode of the diode Ds1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 926, and the cathode of the diode Ds1 is electrically connected to the voltage control device BDs1.
  • the diode Ds1 when the first state occurs, the diode Ds1 is in a reverse bias state, so the diode Ds1 is kept off to make one end of the voltage control device BDs1 float; when the second state occurs, the diode Ds1 is in a reverse bias state. In a forward bias state, the diode Ds1 is turned on so that one end of the voltage control device BDs1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 926 .
  • the filtering unit 923 may also add an inductor (eg, the inductor 728 in FIG. 12C ) connected in series between the second rectifying output terminal 512 and the second filtering output terminal 522 .
  • the filter unit 823 may further include a voltage control element (not shown) and a current limiting element (not shown) arranged in parallel with the newly added inductor, so as to prevent the subsequent circuit from being damaged due to surge current.
  • the connection relationship between the added inductor, the voltage control component, and the current limiting component may refer to the connection relationship among the inductor 926 , the voltage control component BDs1 , and the current limiting component Ds1 .
  • FIG. 12F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the filter unit 624 includes an inductor 626 .
  • the first end of the inductor 626 is coupled to the first pin 501
  • the second end of the inductor 626 is coupled to the first rectification input end of the rectifier circuit 610 , so as to perform low-pass filtering on the signal input from the first pin 501 to The high frequency components in the power signal are filtered out and then supplied to the rectifier circuit 610 .
  • FIG. 12G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 12F , the difference is that the filter unit 724 of this embodiment further includes a voltage control element BDs2 and a blocking element Ds2 in addition to the inductor 626 .
  • the voltage control component BDs2 and the blocking component Ds2 are connected in series.
  • the first end of the voltage control element BDs2 is electrically connected to the first end of the inductor 626
  • the second end of the voltage control element BDs2 is electrically connected to the second end of the choke element Ds2
  • the first end of the choke element Ds2 is electrically connected The second end of the inductor 626 .
  • the current limiting component Ds2 when the first state occurs, the current limiting component Ds2 will be in a disconnected state, so that the end connected to the voltage control component BDs2 and the current limiting component Ds2 is in a floating state (or regarded as the first connection with the inductor 626 ).
  • the two terminals are electrically separated), so the voltage control component BDs2 cannot be turned on in response to the occurrence of the first state; when the second state occurs, the current limiting component Ds2 will be in a conducting state, so that the voltage control component BDs2 and the current limiting component One end connected to Ds2 is equivalent to being electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 626 , so that the voltage control element BDs2 is turned on in response to the occurrence of the second state, so as to discharge/dissipate the surge energy.
  • FIG. 12H is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filter unit and a negative pressure elimination unit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the negative pressure elimination unit may be implemented by the diode 728, but the present application is not limited to this.
  • the filter unit 723 does not resonate, the first filter output terminal 521 will have a high level relative to the second filter output terminal 522, so the diode 728 will be turned off and no current will flow.
  • the filter unit 723 When the filter unit 723 resonates and generates a negative voltage, the second filter output terminal 522 will have a high level relative to the first filter output terminal 521, and at this time, the diode 728 will be forward biased and turned on, so that the reverse current is channeled back to the first filter output 521 .
  • FIG. 13A is a schematic block diagram of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the driving circuit 530 includes a controller 533 and a conversion circuit 534, and performs power conversion in a current source mode to drive the LED module to emit light.
  • the conversion circuit 534 includes a switch circuit (also referred to as a power switch) 535 and a tank circuit 536 .
  • the conversion circuit 534 is coupled to the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522, receives the filtered signal, and converts it into a driving signal according to the control of the controller 533, and the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 output to drive the LED module.
  • the driving signal output by the conversion circuit 534 is a stable current, so that the LED module emits light stably.
  • FIGS. 14A to 14D are schematic diagrams of signal waveforms of driving circuits according to different embodiments of the present application.
  • FIGS. 14A and 14B illustrate the signal waveforms and control scenarios of the driving circuit 530 operating in a continuous conduction mode (CCM)
  • FIGS. 14C and 14D illustrate the driving circuit 530 operating in discontinuous conduction.
  • Signal waveform and control situation of Discontinuous-Conduction Mode (DCM) In the signal waveform diagram, the horizontal axis t represents time, and the vertical axis represents the voltage or current value (depending on the signal type).
  • the controller 533 of this embodiment adjusts the duty cycle (Duty Cycle) of the output lighting control signal Slc according to the received current detection signal Sdet, so that the switch circuit 535 is turned on or turned on in response to the lighting control signal Slc deadline.
  • the energy storage circuit 536 is repeatedly charged/discharged according to the on/off state of the switch circuit 535, so that the driving current ILED received by the LED module 50 can be stably maintained at a preset current value Ipred.
  • the lighting control signal Slc will have a fixed signal period Tlc and signal amplitude, and the length of the pulse enable period (such as Ton1, Ton2, Ton3, or pulse width) in each signal period Tlc will be adjusted according to the control requirements .
  • the duty ratio of the lighting control signal Slc is the ratio of the pulse enable period to the signal period Tlc. For example, if the pulse enable period Ton1 is 40% of the signal period Tlc, it means that the duty ratio of the lighting control signal in the first signal period Tlc is 0.4.
  • the current detection signal Sdet may be, for example, a signal representing the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 , or a signal representing the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch circuit 535 , which is not limited in the present application.
  • FIG. 14A shows the change of the signal waveform of the driving circuit 530 under a plurality of signal periods Tlc when the driving current ILED is less than the predetermined current value Ipred.
  • the switch circuit 535 is turned on during the pulse enable period Ton1 in response to the high-voltage lighting control signal Slc.
  • the conversion circuit 534 not only generates the driving current ILED according to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 and provides the driving current ILED to the LED module 50 , but also provides the LED module 50 with the driving current ILED through the conductive switch circuit 535 .
  • the tank circuit 536 is charged so that the current IL flowing through the tank circuit 536 gradually increases.
  • the energy storage circuit 536 stores energy in response to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522.
  • the switch circuit 535 is turned off in response to the low voltage level of the lighting control signal Slc.
  • the input power on the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 will not be supplied to the LED module 50 , but will be discharged by the energy storage circuit 536 to generate the driving current ILED for supplying
  • the tank circuit 536 will gradually reduce the current IL due to the release of electrical energy. Therefore, even when the lighting control signal Slc is at a low voltage level (ie, a disabled period), the driving circuit 530 will continue to supply power to the LED module 50 based on the energy release of the energy storage circuit 536 . In other words, regardless of whether the switch circuit 535 is turned on or not, the driving circuit 530 will continue to provide a stable driving current ILED to the LED module 50, and the driving current ILED is about I1 in the first signal period Tlc.
  • the controller 533 determines that the current value I1 of the driving current ILED is smaller than the preset current value Ipred according to the current detection signal Sdet, so when the second signal period Tlc is entered, the control signal Slc will be turned on.
  • the pulse enabling period is adjusted to Ton2, wherein the pulse enabling period Ton2 is the pulse enabling period Ton1 plus the unit period Tu1.
  • the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the previous signal period Tlc.
  • the main difference between the two is that since the pulse enable period Ton2 is longer than the pulse enable period Ton1, the energy storage circuit 536 has a longer charging time and a relatively short discharging time, so that the driving circuit 530 is in the second phase.
  • the average value of the driving current ILED provided in each signal period Tlc increases to a current value I2 that is closer to the preset current value Ipred.
  • the controller 533 will further adjust the pulse enable period of the lighting control signal Slc to Ton3, wherein the pulse enable period Ton3 is the pulse enable period Ton2 plus the unit period Tu1, which is equal to the pulse enable period Ton1 plus the period Tu2 (equivalent to two unit periods Tu1).
  • the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the first two signal periods Tlc. Since the pulse enable period Ton3 is further extended, the current value of the driving current ILED increases to I3 and substantially reaches the preset current value Ipred. Thereafter, since the current value I3 of the driving current ILED has reached the predetermined current value Ipred, the controller 533 maintains the same duty cycle, so that the driving current ILED can be continuously maintained at the predetermined current value Ipred.
  • FIG. 14B shows the signal waveform changes of the driving circuit 530 under a plurality of signal periods Tlc when the driving current ILED is greater than the predetermined current value Ipred.
  • the switch circuit 535 is turned on during the pulse enable period Ton1 in response to the high-voltage lighting control signal Slc.
  • the conversion circuit 534 not only generates the driving current ILED according to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 and provides the driving current ILED to the LED module 50 , but also provides the LED module 50 with the driving current ILED through the conductive switch circuit 535 .
  • the tank circuit 536 is charged so that the current IL flowing through the tank circuit 536 gradually increases.
  • the energy storage circuit 536 stores energy in response to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522.
  • the switch circuit 535 is turned off in response to the low voltage level of the lighting control signal Slc.
  • the input power on the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 will not be supplied to the LED module 50, but will be discharged by the energy storage circuit 536 to generate the driving current ILED.
  • the tank circuit 536 will gradually reduce the current IL due to the release of electrical energy. Therefore, even when the lighting control signal Slc is at a low voltage level (ie, a disabled period), the driving circuit 530 will continue to supply power to the LED module 50 based on the energy release of the energy storage circuit 536 .
  • the driving circuit 530 will continue to provide a stable driving current ILED to the LED module 50, and the driving current ILED has a current value of about I4 in the first signal period Tlc.
  • the controller 533 determines that the current value I4 of the driving current ILED is greater than the preset current value Ipred according to the current detection signal Sdet, so when the second signal period Tlc is entered, the control signal Slc will be turned on.
  • the pulse enable period is adjusted to Ton2, wherein the pulse enable period Ton2 is the pulse enable period Ton1 minus the unit period Tu1.
  • the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the previous signal period Tlc.
  • the main difference between the two is that since the pulse enable period Ton2 is shorter than the pulse enable period Ton1, the energy storage circuit 536 has a shorter charging time and a relatively longer discharging time, so that the driving circuit 530 is in the second phase.
  • the average value of the driving current ILED provided in each signal period Tlc is reduced to a current value I5 that is closer to the preset current value Ipred.
  • the controller 533 will further adjust the pulse enable period of the lighting control signal Slc to Ton3, wherein the pulse enable period Ton3 is the pulse enable period Ton2 minus the unit period Tu1, which is equal to the pulse enable period Ton1 minus the period Tu2 (equivalent to two unit periods Tu1).
  • the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the first two signal periods Tlc. Since the pulse enable period Ton3 is further shortened, the current value of the driving current ILED is reduced to I6 and substantially reaches the preset current value Ipred. Thereafter, since the current value I6 of the driving current ILED has reached the predetermined current value Ipred, the controller 533 maintains the same duty cycle, so that the driving current ILED can be continuously maintained at the predetermined current value Ipred.
  • the driving circuit 530 will stepwise adjust the pulse width of the lighting control signal Slc, so that the driving current ILED is gradually adjusted to approach the predetermined current when the driving current ILED is lower than or higher than the predetermined current value Ipred. value Ipred, and then realize constant current output.
  • the driving circuit 530 is operated in the continuous conduction mode as an example, that is, the tank circuit 536 will not discharge until the current IL is zero during the off period of the switch circuit 535 .
  • the driving circuit 530 operating in the continuous conduction mode, the power supplied to the LED module 50 can be more stable and less likely to generate ripples.
  • FIG. 13A and FIG. 14C Please refer to FIG. 13A and FIG. 14C first, wherein the signal waveform and the operation of the driving circuit 530 in FIG. 14C are substantially the same as those in FIG. 14A .
  • the main difference between FIG. 14C and FIG. 14A is that the driving circuit 530 of this embodiment operates in the discontinuous conduction mode, so the tank circuit 536 will discharge until the current IL is equal to zero during the pulse disable period of the lighting control signal Slc. And the charging is performed again at the beginning of the next signal period Tlc.
  • FIG. 14A For other operation descriptions, reference can be made to the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 14A , which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 13A and FIG. 14D wherein the signal waveform and the operation of the driving circuit 530 in FIG. 14D are substantially the same as those in FIG. 14B.
  • the main difference between FIG. 14D and FIG. 14B is that the driving circuit 530 of this embodiment operates in the discontinuous conduction mode, so the tank circuit 536 will discharge until the current IL is equal to zero during the pulse disable period of the lighting control signal Slc, And the charging is performed again at the beginning of the next signal period Tlc.
  • Other operation descriptions can be referred to the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 14B , which will not be repeated here.
  • the driving circuit 530 By supplying power to the LED module 50 by the driving circuit 530 operating in the discontinuous conduction mode, the power loss of the driving circuit 530 can be reduced, and thus the conversion efficiency can be higher.
  • the driving circuit 530 uses a single-stage DC-DC conversion circuit as an example, the present application is not limited to this.
  • the driving circuit 530 can also be a two-stage driving circuit composed of an active power factor correction circuit and a DC-DC conversion circuit.
  • any power conversion circuit structure that can be used for driving an LED light source can be applied here.
  • the above-mentioned operation description about power conversion is not limited to being applied to driving LED straight tube lamps with AC input, but can be applied to various types of LED lamps powered by AC power (ie, ballastless LED lamps), such as In LED bulbs, LED filament lamps or integrated LED lamps, the present application is not limited to this.
  • FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the driving circuit 630 is a step-down DC-DC conversion circuit, including a controller 633 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 636 , a freewheeling diode 634 , a capacitor 637 and a switch 635 .
  • the driving circuit 630 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to convert the received filtered signal into a driving signal, which is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 for driving. between the LED modules.
  • the switch 635 is a MOSFET and has a control terminal, a first terminal and a second terminal.
  • the first end of the switch 635 is coupled to the anode of the freewheeling diode 634, the second end is coupled to the second filter output end 522, and the control end is coupled to the controller 633 to receive the control of the controller 633 so that the first end and the second end are connected to each other. between on or off.
  • the first drive output end 531 is coupled to the first filter output end 521
  • the second drive output end 532 is coupled to one end of the inductor 636
  • the other end of the inductor 636 is coupled to the first end of the switch 635 .
  • the capacitor 637 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to stabilize the voltage difference between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the negative terminal of the freewheeling diode 634 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 .
  • the controller 633 determines the on and off time of the switch 635 according to the current detection signal S535 or/and S531, that is, controls the duty cycle (Duty Cycle) of the switch 635 to adjust the magnitude of the driving signal.
  • the current detection signal S535 represents the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch 635 .
  • the current detection signal S531 represents the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 . According to either of the current detection signals S531 and S535 , the controller 633 can obtain information on the magnitude of the power converted by the conversion circuit.
  • the switch 635 When the switch 635 is turned on, the current of the filtered signal flows in from the first filter output terminal 521, passes through the capacitor 637 and the first drive output terminal 531 to the LED module, the inductor 636, and the switch 635, and then passes through the second filter output terminal. 522 outflow. At this time, the capacitor 637 and the inductor 636 store energy. When the switch 635 is turned off, the inductor 636 and the capacitor 637 release the stored energy, and the current freewheels to the first driving output end 531 through the freewheeling diode 634 so that the LED module continues to emit light. It is worth noting that the capacitor 637 is not an essential component and can be omitted, so it is represented by a dotted line in the figure. In some application environments, the effect of stabilizing the LED module current can be achieved by the inductance that resists the change of the current, and the capacitor 637 can be omitted.
  • the driving circuit 630 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness.
  • the inductance 636 acting as the energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 635 is turned off. On the one hand, the LED module keeps emitting light continuously, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value.
  • the switch 635 When the switch 635 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby preventing the LED module from emitting light intermittently, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
  • FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the driving circuit 730 is a boost DC to DC conversion circuit, including a controller 733 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 736 , a freewheeling diode 734 , a capacitor 737 and a switch 735 .
  • the driving circuit 730 converts the filtered signals received by the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 into driving signals to drive the LEDs coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 module.
  • One end of the inductor 736 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 , and the other end is coupled to the anode of the filter diode 734 and the first end of the switch 735 .
  • the second terminal of the switch 735 is coupled to the second filtering output terminal 522 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the cathode of the freewheeling diode 734 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 .
  • the capacitor 737 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the controller 733 is coupled to the control terminal of the switch 735, and controls the switch 735 to be turned on and off according to the current detection signal S531 or/and the current detection signal S535.
  • the switch 735 When the switch 735 is turned on, the current flows in from the first filter output terminal 521 , flows through the inductor 736 , and then flows out from the second filter output terminal 522 after the switch 735 .
  • the current flowing through the inductor 736 increases with time, and the inductor 736 is in an energy storage state.
  • the capacitor 737 is in a state of releasing energy, so as to continuously drive the LED module to emit light.
  • the inductor 736 When the switch 735 is turned off, the inductor 736 is in an energy release state, and the current of the inductor 736 decreases with time. The current of the inductor 736 freewheels to the capacitor 737 and the LED module through the freewheeling diode 734 . At this time, the capacitor 737 is in an energy storage state.
  • the capacitor 737 is an optional component, which is represented by a dotted line.
  • the capacitor 737 is omitted, when the switch 735 is turned on, the current of the inductor 736 does not flow through the LED module and the LED module does not emit light; when the switch 735 is turned off, the current of the inductor 736 flows through the LED module through the freewheeling diode 734 and Make the LED module glow.
  • a detection resistor (not shown) is disposed between the switch 735 and the second filter output terminal 522 .
  • the switch 735 When the switch 735 is turned on, the current flowing through the detection resistor will cause a voltage difference between the two ends of the detection resistor, so the voltage on the detection resistor can be used as the current detection signal S535 to be sent back to the controller 733 for control.
  • a large current may be more than 10A
  • a large current may be more than 10A
  • the driving circuit 730 may further include a clamping component, which may be connected to the detection resistor, for when the current flowing through the detection resistor or the voltage difference between the two ends of the current detection resistor exceeds a predetermined value, The loop of the sense resistor is clamped to limit the current flowing through the sense resistor.
  • the clamping element may be, for example, a plurality of diodes, and the plurality of diodes are connected in series to form a diode string, and the diode string and the detection resistor are connected in parallel with each other.
  • the diode string connected in parallel with the sense resistor is rapidly turned on, so that both ends of the sense resistor can be limited to a specific level. For example, if the diode string consists of 5 diodes, since the turn-on voltage of a single diode is about 0.7V, the diode string can clamp the voltage across the detection resistor to about 3.5V.
  • the driving circuit 730 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness.
  • the inductance 736 acting as an energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 735 is turned off, on the one hand, the LED module continues to emit light, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value, and when the switch 735 is switched off, the stored energy is released.
  • the switch 735 When the switch 735 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby preventing the LED module from emitting light intermittently, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
  • FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the driving circuit 830 is a step-down DC-DC conversion circuit, including a controller 833 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 836 , a freewheeling diode 834 , a capacitor 837 and a switch 835 .
  • the driving circuit 830 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to convert the received filtered signal into a driving signal, which is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 for driving. between the LED modules.
  • the first end of the switch 835 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 , the second end is coupled to the cathode of the freewheeling diode 834 , and the control end is coupled to the controller 833 to receive the lighting control signal of the controller 833 to make the first end The state between the second terminal and the second terminal is on or off.
  • the anode of the freewheeling diode 834 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 .
  • One end of the inductor 836 is coupled to the second end of the switch 835 , and the other end is coupled to the first driving output end 531 .
  • the second driving output terminal 532 is coupled to the anode of the freewheeling diode 834 .
  • the capacitor 837 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to stabilize the voltage between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the controller 833 controls the switching on and off of the switch 835 according to the current detection signal S531 or/and the current detection signal S535.
  • the switch 835 When the switch 835 is turned on, the current flows from the first filter output terminal 521 , passes through the switch 835 , the inductor 836 , passes through the capacitor 837 , the first drive output terminal 531 , the LED module and the second drive output terminal 532 , and then flows through the second filter output terminal 532 .
  • the filtered output 522 flows out.
  • the current flowing through the inductor 836 and the voltage of the capacitor 837 increase with time, and the inductor 836 and the capacitor 837 are in an energy storage state.
  • the inductor 836 When the switch 835 is turned off, the inductor 836 is in an energy release state, and the current of the inductor 836 decreases with time. At this time, the current of the inductor 836 returns to the inductor 836 through the first driving output terminal 531 , the LED module, the second driving output terminal 532 , and the freewheeling diode 834 to form a freewheeling current.
  • the capacitor 837 is an optional component, which is represented by a dotted line in the figure.
  • the current of the inductor 836 can flow through the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to drive the LED module to continuously emit light.
  • the driving circuit 830 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness.
  • the inductance 836 acting as the energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 835 is turned off. On the one hand, the LED module can keep emitting light continuously, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value.
  • the switch 835 When the switch 835 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby avoiding intermittent light emission of the LED module, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
  • FIG. 13E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the driving circuit 930 is a step-down DC-DC conversion circuit, including a controller 933 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 936 , a freewheeling diode 934 , a capacitor 937 and a switch 935 .
  • the driving circuit 930 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to convert the received filtered signal into a driving signal, which is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 for driving. between the LED modules.
  • the inductor 936 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 and the second driving output end 532 , and the other end is coupled to the first end of the switch 935 .
  • the second terminal of the switch 935 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 , and the control terminal of the switch 935 is coupled to the controller 933 to be turned on or off according to the lighting control signal of the controller 933 .
  • the anode of the freewheeling diode 934 is coupled to the connection point between the inductor 936 and the switch 935 , and the cathode is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the capacitor 937 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to stably drive the LED module coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the controller 933 controls the on and off of the switch 935 according to the current detection signal S531 or/and the current detection signal S535.
  • the switch 935 When the switch 935 is turned on, the current flows in from the first filter output terminal 521 , flows through the inductor 936 , and then flows out from the second filter output terminal 522 after the switch 935 .
  • the current flowing through the inductor 936 increases with time, and the inductor 936 is in a state of energy storage; the voltage of the capacitor 937 decreases with time, and the capacitor 937 is in a state of energy release, so as to keep the LED module emitting light.
  • the inductor 936 When the switch 935 is turned off, the inductor 936 is in an energy release state, and the current of the inductor 936 decreases with time. At this time, the current of the inductor 936 returns to the inductor 936 through the freewheeling diode 934 , the first driving output terminal 531 , the LED module and the second driving output terminal 532 to form a freewheeling current. At this time, the capacitor 937 is in an energy storage state, and the voltage of the capacitor 937 increases with time.
  • the capacitor 937 is an optional component, which is represented by a dotted line in the figure.
  • the switch 935 When the capacitor 937 is omitted and the switch 935 is turned on, the current of the inductor 936 does not flow through the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 so that the LED module does not emit light.
  • the switch 935 When the switch 935 is turned off, the current of the inductor 936 flows through the LED module through the freewheeling diode 934 to make the LED module emit light.
  • the driving circuit 930 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness.
  • the inductance 936 acting as the energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 935 is turned off. On the one hand, the LED module continues to emit light, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value.
  • the switch 935 When the switch 935 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby preventing the LED module from emitting light intermittently, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
  • the short circuit board 253 is divided into a first short circuit board and a second short circuit board connected to both ends of the long circuit board 251, and the electronic components in the power module are respectively arranged on the short circuit boards 253 on the first short circuit board and the second short circuit board.
  • the length dimensions of the first short circuit board and the second short circuit board may be approximately the same, or may not be consistent.
  • the length dimension of the first short circuit board (the right circuit board of the short circuit board 253 in FIG. 6A and the left circuit board of the short circuit board 253 in FIG. 6B ) is 30% of the length dimension of the second short circuit board- 80%. More preferably, the length dimension of the first short circuit board is 1/3-2/3 of the length dimension of the second short circuit board.
  • the length dimension of the first short circuit board is approximately half the size of the second short circuit board.
  • the size of the second short circuit board is between 15mm and 65mm (depending on the application).
  • the first short circuit board is arranged in the lamp cap at one end of the LED straight tube lamp, and the second short circuit board is arranged in the lamp cap at the opposite end of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the capacitors of the driving circuit may be formed by two or more capacitors connected in parallel in practice. At least part or all of the capacitance of the driving circuit in the power module is arranged on the first short circuit board of the short circuit board 253 . That is, the rectifier circuit, the filter circuit, the inductance of the drive circuit, the controller, the switch, the diode, etc. are all arranged on the second short circuit board of the short circuit board 253 . Inductors, controllers, switches, etc.
  • capacitors are components with high temperature in electronic components, and some or all capacitors are arranged on different circuit boards, so that capacitors (especially electrolytic capacitors) can avoid the impact of high temperature components on capacitors. It affects the life of the capacitor and improves the reliability of the capacitor. Further, the EMI problem can also be solved because the capacitor is separated from the rectifier circuit and the filter circuit in space.
  • the components with higher temperature in the driving circuit are arranged on one side of the lamp tube (which can be referred to as the first side of the lamp tube), and the other components are arranged on the other side of the lamp tube (which can be referred to as the lamp tube). the second side of the tube).
  • the lamps are connected to the lamp sockets in a staggered arrangement, that is, the first side of any one of the lamps is adjacent to the second side of other adjacent lamps.
  • Such a configuration can make the components with higher temperature evenly arranged in the lighting system, thereby preventing the heat from concentrating on a specific position in the lighting and affecting the overall luminous efficacy of the LED.
  • FIG. 15A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of this embodiment includes a first rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 and a drive circuit 530 , and an overvoltage protection circuit 550 is further added.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 550 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 to detect the filtered signal, and clamp the level of the filtered signal when the level of the filtered signal is higher than the set overvoltage value.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 550 can protect the components of the LED module 50 from being damaged by the overvoltage.
  • FIG. 15B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the power supply module 5 of this embodiment is substantially the same as the power supply module 5 of FIG. 15A , and the difference between the two is mainly that the overvoltage protection circuit 550 of this embodiment is disposed between the driving circuit 530 and the LED module 50 , that is, the overvoltage protection circuit
  • the circuit 550 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to detect the driving signal and clamp the level of the driving signal when the level of the driving signal is higher than the set overvoltage value. Therefore, the overvoltage protection circuit 550 can protect the components of the LED module 50 from being damaged by the overvoltage.
  • FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an overvoltage protection circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 650 includes a Zener diode 652, such as a Zener Diode, coupled to the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 (as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 15A ), or coupled to the first driver The output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 (as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 15B ).
  • a Zener diode 652 such as a Zener Diode
  • the voltage difference between the Zener diode 652 at the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 reaches the breakdown voltage, it is turned on, so that the voltage difference is clamped at the breakdown voltage.
  • the breakdown voltage is preferably in the range of 40-100V, more preferably in the range of 55-75V.
  • FIG. 15D is a schematic block diagram of an overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 750 includes a voltage sampling circuit 751 and an enabling circuit 752, wherein the voltage sampling circuit 751 is coupled to the filtering output terminals 521 and 522 to receive the filtered signal, the enabling circuit 752 is coupled to the output terminal of the voltage sampling circuit 751, and The output terminal of the enabling circuit 752 is coupled to the controller 533 of the driving circuit.
  • the voltage sampling circuit 751 samples the filtered signal, and generates a voltage detection signal to the enable circuit 752 accordingly, so that the enable circuit 752 determines whether to enable the overvoltage protection in response to the voltage detection signal, and correspondingly controls the controller 533 of the driving circuit working status.
  • the enabling circuit 752 when the LED straight tube lamp receives an external driving signal with an excessively high voltage, the enabling circuit 752 will enable/enable the overvoltage protection in response to the voltage sampling signal, so that the controller 533 reduces or disables the output current, thereby preventing the LED straight tube lamp from being damaged due to receiving unexpected high voltage.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 750 can enable the overvoltage protection to reduce the output current/power of the drive circuit, or stop the drive circuit from outputting the drive current, when the peak value or effective value of the external driving voltage is higher than a certain threshold.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit further includes a delay circuit 753 , the delay circuit 753 is coupled to the voltage sampling circuit 751 and the enabling circuit 752 to affect the voltage provided by the voltage sampling circuit 751 to the enabling circuit 752 detection signal, so as to prevent the enabling circuit 752 from malfunctioning in response to the voltage detection signal due to the start-up high voltage when the lamp is energized under certain application scenarios, wherein the delay circuit 753 affects the voltage detection signal.
  • the rising rate of the voltage detection signal or the suppression of the instantaneous change of the voltage detection signal so that the instantaneous change of the voltage detection signal does not immediately cause the enable circuit 752 to enable/enable the overvoltage protection.
  • the LED straight tube lamp when used with an instant start ballast, the LED straight tube lamp will receive an instantaneous high voltage when powered on, and this high voltage may cause malfunction of the enabling circuit 752 .
  • the starting high voltage of the instant-start ballast will be suppressed by the delay circuit 753 and not directly reflected on the voltage detection signal, thereby preventing the enabling circuit 752 from malfunctioning.
  • the delay circuit 753 delays the voltage detection circuit output by the voltage sampling circuit 751 , and transmits the delayed voltage detection signal to the enabling circuit 752 .
  • FIGS. 15E to 15H Various circuit architecture embodiments of the overvoltage protection circuit 750 are described below with reference to FIGS. 15E to 15H .
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 850 of this embodiment includes a voltage sampling circuit 851 , an enabling circuit 852 and a delay circuit 853 .
  • the voltage sampling circuit 851 includes resistors Rg1, Rg2 and Rg3 and a Zener diode ZDg1, wherein the resistors Rg1 and Rg2 form a voltage divider circuit, the first end of the resistor Rg1 is coupled to the first filter output end 521, and the first end of the resistor Rg2 is coupled to The second terminal of the resistor Rg1, and the second terminal of the resistor Rg2 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 (in some embodiments, the second filter output terminal 522 and the ground terminal GND are equal-level terminals); the Zener diode ZDg1 The cathode is coupled to the second terminal of the resistor Rg1 and the first terminal of the resistor Rg1 (ie, the voltage dividing point of the voltage divider circuit), and the anode of the Zener di
  • the filtered signal between the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 acts on the enabling circuit through the voltage division of the resistors Rg1 and Rg2 and the voltage regulation of the Zener diode ZDg1 and the resistor Rg3 852 input.
  • the voltage signal on the first end of the resistor Rg3 is the voltage detection signal generated by the voltage sampling circuit 851.
  • the enable circuit 852 includes a transistor Mg1 having a first terminal, a second terminal and a control terminal.
  • the control terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the first terminal of the resistor Rg3 and the anode of the Zener diode ZDg1 to receive the voltage detection signal; at least one of the first terminal and the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the controller 533 of the driving circuit.
  • the enabling circuit 852 further includes a resistor Rg4, wherein the resistor Rg4 can be connected in series between the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 and the controller 533, or between the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 and the controller 533 in series between the device 533.
  • resistor Rg4 is connected in series between the first end of the transistor Mg1 and the controller 533 , but the present disclosure is not limited to this.
  • the specific connection configuration example between the enabling circuit 852 and the controller 533 may refer to the following embodiments in FIGS. 15F to 15H .
  • the delay circuit 853 includes capacitors Cg1 and Cg2.
  • the first end of the capacitor Cg1 is coupled to the second end of the resistor Rg1, the first end of the resistor Rg2 and the cathode of the Zener diode ZDg1, and the second end of the capacitor Cg1 is coupled to the second end of the resistor Rg1.
  • the filter output terminal 522 ; the first terminal of the capacitor Cg2 is coupled to the first terminal of the resistor Rg3 and the anode of the Zener diode ZDg1 , and the second terminal of the capacitor Cg2 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 .
  • the instantaneous change of the voltage detection signal is suppressed by the capacitors Cg1 and Cg2.
  • FIGS. 15F to 15H are partial circuit architecture diagrams illustrating various embodiments of different circuit connections between the enabling circuit 852 and the controller 533 .
  • the controller 533 has, for example, a power supply pin P_VCC, a driving pin P_G, a compensation pin P_COMP, and a current sampling pin P_CS, wherein the controller 533 receives a driving voltage at the power supply pin P_VCC that meets the startup requirements VCC (for example, 5V) is activated, and the output current of the driving circuit is controlled by the signal of the driving pin P_G.
  • VCC startup requirements
  • the controller 533 also adjusts the pulse width of the output lighting control signal according to the level on the current sampling pin P_CS (representing the magnitude of the driving current) and the level on the compensation pin P_COMP (representing the magnitude of the input voltage).
  • the output current/output power of the circuit can be roughly maintained at a certain value.
  • the pin that enables the controller 533 to start or stop working in response to the level on it is the power supply pin P_VCC (or the first pin). pin); the pin that can make the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 decrease as the voltage on it decreases (at least in a certain voltage range with this relationship) is the compensation pin P_COMP (or can be referred to as the second pin); and the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 can be reduced as the voltage on it decreases (at least in a certain voltage interval with this relationship)
  • the pin is the current sampling pin P_CS (or can be referred to as the third pin).
  • the driving pin P_G may be a pin that is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor/power switch 535 and provides a lighting control signal (this type is taken as an example in the drawings, but not only In other embodiments, the transistor/power switch 535 will be integrated with the controller 533, and the drive pin P_G of the controller may correspond to the transistor/power switch 535 integrated inside the controller.
  • the drain, the above types of drive pins can be collectively referred to as the fourth pin.
  • the drive pin P_G of the controller 533 is configured to be coupled to the gate of the transistor 535 as an example, and the first end of the transistor 535 is coupled to the conversion circuit, and the second end of the transistor 535 is passed through The sampling resistor Rcs is coupled to the ground terminal GND.
  • the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 of the enabling circuit is coupled to the power supply pin P_VCC of the controller 533 , and the second terminal of the transistor Mg2 is coupled to the ground terminal GND.
  • the enabling circuit enables the overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal
  • the transistor Mg1 is turned on in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the voltage of the power supply pin P_VCC is pulled down from the driving voltage VCC to the ground level/low level, Then, the controller 533 is stopped.
  • the transistor Mg1 is turned off in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the voltage on the power supply pin P_VCC is maintained at the driving voltage VCC, and the controller 533 It may be activated based on the driving voltage VCC and output a lighting control signal to the switch circuit 535 .
  • the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 of the enabling circuit is coupled to the compensation pin P_COMP of the controller 533 through the resistor Rg4 , and the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the ground terminal GND.
  • the transistor Mg1 When the enabling circuit enables the overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal, the transistor Mg1 will be turned on in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the compensation pin P_COMP is pulled down to a specific level (depending on the setting of the resistance value of the resistor Rg4) ) or ground level/low level (in the absence of the resistor Rg4), so that the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 decreases with the voltage drop on the compensation pin P_COMP, so that the output Current/output power reduction.
  • the transistor Mg1 will be turned off in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the voltage on the compensation pin P_COMP is not affected by the enable circuit, at this time the controller The 533 modulates the duty cycle of the lighting control signal according to a predetermined control mechanism.
  • the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 of the enabling circuit receives the driving voltage VCC through the resistor Rg4, and the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the current sampling pin P_CS of the controller 533 and simultaneously is coupled to the first end of the sampling resistor Rcs.
  • the transistor Mg1 When the enabling circuit enables the overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal, the transistor Mg1 will be turned on in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the divided voltage of the driving voltage VCC will be superimposed on the current sampling pin P_CS, so that the current sampling leads
  • the voltage on the pin P_CS is raised to a specific level (depending on the resistance value setting of the resistor Rg4 and the resistor Rcs), so that the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 follows the current sampling pin P_CS. The voltage rises and falls, so that the output current/output power is reduced.
  • the controller The 533 modulates the duty cycle of the lighting control signal according to a predetermined control mechanism.
  • FIG. 16A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • the power supply module 5 of this embodiment includes a first rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 and a driving circuit 530 , and an auxiliary power supply module 560 is added, wherein the power supply module 5 may also include LEDs Parts of module 50.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 is coupled between the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 detects the filtered signals on the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 , and determines whether to provide auxiliary power to the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 according to the detection results.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 provides auxiliary power so that the LED module 50 can continue to emit light.
  • the auxiliary voltage is determined according to the auxiliary power supply voltage provided by the auxiliary power supply module 560 .
  • FIG. 16B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of this embodiment includes a first rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an auxiliary power supply module 560 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 detects the driving signals of the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 , and determines whether to provide auxiliary power to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 according to the detection results.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 provides auxiliary power, so that the LED module 50 can continue to emit light.
  • the LED module 50 may only receive the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 560 as the working power supply, and the external driving signal is used for charging the auxiliary power supply module 560 . Because this embodiment only uses the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 560 to light the LED module 50, that is, whether the external driving signal is provided by the commercial power or provided by the ballast, the auxiliary power supply module is firstly supplied to the auxiliary power supply module. The energy storage unit of 560 is charged, and then the back end is powered by the energy storage unit. Thereby, the LED straight tube lamp applying the power module architecture of this embodiment can be compatible with the external driving signal provided by the commercial power.
  • auxiliary power supply module 560 is connected to the output end of the filter circuit 520 (the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 ) or the output end of the drive circuit 530 (the first drive output end between the terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532), so in an exemplary embodiment, its circuit can be placed in the lamp tube (for example, adjacent to the LED module 50), so as to avoid the power supply caused by the long trace. transmission loss.
  • the circuit of the auxiliary power supply module 560 can also be placed in the lamp head, so that the heat energy generated by the auxiliary power supply module 560 during charging and discharging is less likely to affect the operation and luminous efficacy of the LED module.
  • FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 660 in this embodiment can be applied to the configuration of the auxiliary power supply module 560 described above.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 660 includes an energy storage unit 663 and a voltage detection circuit 664 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 660 has an auxiliary power supply positive terminal 661 and an auxiliary power supply negative terminal 662 to be respectively coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522, or respectively coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532.
  • the voltage detection circuit 664 detects the level of the signals on the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply to determine whether to discharge the power of the energy storage unit 663 through the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply.
  • the energy storage unit 663 is a battery or a super capacitor.
  • the voltage detection circuit 664 uses the signals on the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply to store energy when the level of the signal on the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply is higher than the voltage of the energy storage unit 663 .
  • Unit 663 is charged.
  • the energy storage unit 663 discharges externally through the auxiliary power positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power negative terminal 662 .
  • the voltage detection circuit 664 includes a diode 665 , a bipolar junction transistor 666 and a resistor 667 .
  • the anode of the diode 665 is coupled to the anode of the energy storage unit 663, and the cathode is coupled to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply.
  • the negative terminal of the energy storage unit 663 is coupled to the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply.
  • the collector of the bipolar junction transistor 666 is coupled to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply, and the emitter is coupled to the positive terminal of the energy storage unit 663 .
  • One end of the resistor 667 is coupled to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply, and the other end is coupled to the base of the bipolar junction transistor 666 .
  • the resistor 667 turns on the bipolar junction transistor 666 when the collector of the bipolar junction transistor 666 is higher than the emitter by a turn-on voltage.
  • the filtered signal will charge the energy storage unit 663 through the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 and the conductive bipolar junction transistor 666, or the driving signal will be charged through the
  • the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 and the turned-on bipolar junction transistor 666 charge the energy storage unit 663 until the collector-shooting difference of the bipolar junction transistor 666 is equal to or less than the conduction. until the voltage is turned on.
  • the energy storage unit 663 provides power to the LED module 50 through the diode 665 to maintain light emission.
  • the highest voltage stored by the energy storage unit 663 during charging will be at least lower than the voltage applied to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply by a turn-on voltage of the bipolar junction transistor 666 .
  • the voltage output by the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply is lower than the voltage of the energy storage unit 663 by a threshold voltage of the diode 665 . Therefore, when the auxiliary power module starts to supply power, the supplied voltage will be low (approximately equal to the sum of the threshold voltage of the diode 665 and the turn-on voltage of the bipolar junction transistor 666).
  • the auxiliary power supply module when the auxiliary power supply module supplies power, the lowering of the voltage will significantly reduce the brightness of the LED module 50 . In this way, when the auxiliary power supply module is applied to the emergency lighting system or the always-on lighting system, the user can know that the main lighting power supply, such as the mains, is abnormal, and can take necessary preventive measures.
  • the configuration of the embodiment of FIGS. 16A to 16C can be applied to a multi-lamp lamp structure.
  • one of the four LED straight tube lamps may include an auxiliary power supply module.
  • the LED straight tube light containing the auxiliary power supply module will continue to be lit, while other LED straight tube lights will be turned off.
  • the LED straight tube lamp provided with the auxiliary power supply module can be arranged in the middle position of the lamp.
  • a plurality of the four LED straight tube lamps may include auxiliary power supply modules.
  • the LED straight tube lamps including the auxiliary power supply module can all be lit by the auxiliary power at the same time. In this way, even in an emergency situation, the whole lamp can still provide a certain brightness.
  • the two LED straight tube lamps can be arranged in a staggered arrangement with the LED straight tube lamps without the auxiliary power supply module.
  • a plurality of the four LED straight tube lamps may include auxiliary power supply modules.
  • some of the LED straight tube lamps will be lit by the auxiliary power first, and after a period of time (for example, yes), the other part of the LED straight tube lamps will be lit by the auxiliary power.
  • the present embodiment can extend the lighting time of the LED straight tube lamp in an emergency state by coordinating with other lamps to provide the auxiliary power sequence.
  • the auxiliary power supply modules in different lamps can be set to start up time, or the auxiliary power can be communicated by setting a controller in each lamp.
  • the operation state between the power supply modules is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 16D is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power supply module according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an auxiliary power supply module 760 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 of this embodiment is connected between the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 to receive an external driving signal and perform charging and discharging based on the external driving signal Actions.
  • the operation of the auxiliary power supply module 760 may be similar to an Off-line UPS.
  • the external power grid/external drive signal will directly supply power to the rectifier circuit 510 and charge the auxiliary power supply module 760 at the same time; once the power supply quality of the mains power supply is unstable or power outage, the auxiliary power supply module 760 will cut off the external power grid and the rectifier circuit 510 and the auxiliary power supply module 760 supplies power to the rectifier circuit 510 until the power supply of the grid returns to normal.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 of this embodiment may operate in a redundant manner, for example, and will only intervene in power supply when the power grid is powered off.
  • the power supplied by the auxiliary power supply module 760 may be alternating current or direct current.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 includes, for example, an energy storage unit and a voltage detection circuit.
  • the voltage detection circuit detects an external driving signal and determines whether to enable the energy storage unit to provide auxiliary power to the input end of the rectifier circuit 510 according to the detection result. .
  • the energy storage unit of the auxiliary power supply module 760 provides auxiliary power, so that the LED module 50 can continue to emit light based on the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary energy storage unit.
  • the energy storage unit for providing auxiliary power may be implemented by using energy storage components such as batteries or super capacitors, but the present application is not limited thereto.
  • FIG. 16E is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 includes, for example, a charging unit 761 and an auxiliary power supply unit 762 .
  • the output of the auxiliary power supply unit 762 is connected to the power supply circuit between the external power grid 508 and the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the system further includes a switch unit 763, which is respectively connected to the external power grid 508, the output terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 762 and the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510, wherein the switch unit 763 selectively turns on the external power grid according to the power supply status of the external power grid 508.
  • the loop between 508 and the rectifier circuit 510 or the loop between the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the power supplied by the external power grid 508 will be provided to the input terminal of the rectification circuit 510 through the switch unit 763 as the external driving signal Sed.
  • the charging unit 761 will charge the auxiliary power supply unit 762 based on the power supplied by the external power grid 508, and the auxiliary power supply unit 762 will not discharge the back end rectifier circuit 510 in response to the external driving signal Sed normally transmitted on the power supply circuit.
  • the auxiliary power supply unit 762 starts to discharge through the switch unit 763 to provide auxiliary power as the external drive signal Sed to the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • FIG. 16F is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and an auxiliary power supply module 860.
  • the input terminals Pi1 and Pi2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860 in this embodiment receive external driving signals, and perform charging and discharging actions based on the external driving signals, and then the generated auxiliary power is
  • the output terminals Po1 and Po2 are provided to the rectifier circuit 510 at the back end.
  • the first pin (eg 501 ) and the second pin (eg 502 ) of the LED straight tube lamp can be the input terminals Pi1 and Pi2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860 or the output terminal Po1 with Po2. If the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are the input ends Pi1 and Pi2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860, it means that the auxiliary power supply module 860 is arranged inside the LED straight tube lamp; if the first pin 501 and the second pin are 502 is the output terminals Po1 and Po2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860, which means that the auxiliary power supply module 860 is disposed outside the LED straight tube lamp. Subsequent embodiments will further describe the specific structural configuration of the auxiliary power supply module.
  • the operation of the auxiliary power supply module 860 is similar to an On-line UPS, and the external power grid/external drive signal will not directly supply power to the rectifier circuit 510, but will pass through the auxiliary power supply module 860. Power on.
  • the external power grid and the LED straight tube light are isolated from each other, and the auxiliary power supply module 860 is involved in the whole process of starting/using the LED straight tube light, thereby enabling the power supply provided to the rectifier circuit 510 Not affected by the instability of external grid power supply.
  • FIG. 16G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application, which illustrates an example configuration of the auxiliary power supply module 860 in an online operation.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 860 includes a charging unit 861 and an auxiliary power supply unit 862 .
  • the input terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the external power grid 508
  • the output terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the first input terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 .
  • the second input of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 is connected to the external grid 508 and its output is connected to the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the auxiliary power supply unit 862 performs power conversion based on the power provided by the external power grid 508, and generates an external drive signal Sed to the rectifier circuit 510 at the back end accordingly; during this period, the charging The unit 861 simultaneously charges the energy storage unit in the auxiliary power supply unit 862 .
  • the auxiliary power supply unit 862 performs power conversion based on the power provided by its own energy storage unit, and generates an external drive signal Sed to the back end rectifier circuit 510 accordingly.
  • the power conversion action described herein may be one of circuit operations such as rectification, filtering, boosting, and bucking, or a reasonable combination thereof, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the operation of the auxiliary power supply module 860 is similar to the Line-Interactive UPS, and its basic operation is similar to the offline UPS, but the difference lies in the line-interactive operation.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 860 monitors the power supply of the external power grid at any time, and has a boost and voltage reduction compensation circuit to correct the power supply in real time when the external power grid is unsatisfactory, thereby reducing the frequency of switching to use the battery for power supply.
  • FIG. 16H is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the third embodiment of the present application, which illustrates an example configuration of the auxiliary power supply module 860 for online interactive operation.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 860 includes, for example, a charging unit 861 , an auxiliary power supply unit 862 and a switch unit 863 .
  • the input terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the external power grid 508, and the output terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the input terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862.
  • the switch unit 863 is respectively connected to the external power grid 508 , the output terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510 , wherein the switch unit 863 selectively conducts the external power grid 508 and the rectifier circuit 510 according to the power supply state of the external power grid 508 The loop between them, or the loop between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the switch unit 863 will turn on the loop between the external power grid 508 and the rectifier circuit 510, and disconnect the loop between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifier circuit 510, so that the external power grid 508 The supplied power is provided to the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510 through the switch unit 863 as the external drive signal Sed.
  • the charging unit 861 charges the auxiliary power supply unit 862 based on the power supplied by the external power grid 508 .
  • the switch unit 863 When the power supply of the external power grid 508 is abnormal or powered off, the switch unit 863 will switch to conduct the circuit between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifier circuit 510, so that the auxiliary power supply unit 862 starts to discharge to provide auxiliary power as the external drive signal Sed to the Rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862 may be alternating current or direct current.
  • the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862 includes, for example, an energy storage unit and a DC-AC converter; when the supplied power is DC power, the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862 includes, for example, a The energy storage unit and the direct current to direct current converter (DC-DC converter), or only the energy storage unit, is not limited in this application.
  • the energy storage unit may be, for example, a battery module in which several energy storage batteries are combined.
  • the DC-to-DC converter may be, for example, a boost, buck, or buck-boost DC-to-DC converter circuit.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 further includes a voltage detection circuit (not shown).
  • the voltage detection circuit can be used to detect the working state of the external power grid 508, and send a signal according to the detection result to control the switch unit 763/863 or the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862, so as to determine that the LED straight tube lamp works in the normal lighting mode (that is, through the external Grid 508 power supply) or emergency mode (ie, power supply through auxiliary power supply modules 760/860).
  • the switch units 763/863 can be implemented by using a three-terminal switch or a complementary switching two switches.
  • the two switches can be connected in series to the power supply loop of the external power grid 508 and the power supply loop of the auxiliary power supply modules 760/860 respectively; and the control method is that when one of the switches is turned on, The other switch is turned off.
  • the switch unit 763/863 may be implemented by a relay.
  • the relay is similar to the selection switch of 2 modes. If it works in the general lighting mode (that is, the mains is used as the external driving signal), after the power is turned on, the relay is energized and closed. At this time, the power module of the LED straight tube lamp is not connected to the auxiliary power supply module. 760/860 is electrically connected; if the mains is abnormal, the electromagnetic suction of the relay disappears and returns to the original position. At this time, the power module of the LED straight tube lamp is electrically connected to the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 through the relay, so that the auxiliary power supply module Work.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 does not work, and the mains power supply provides power; and the mains power supplies the battery module in the auxiliary power supply module to charge.
  • the battery module boosts the voltage of the battery module to the voltage required when the LED module 50 operates through a boost-type DC-DC conversion circuit, and the LED module 50 emits light.
  • the voltage after boosting is 4-10 times the voltage of the battery module before boosting (preferably 4-6 times); the voltage required for the LED module 50 to work is between 40-80V (preferably between 55-75V) , 60V is selected in this case).
  • a single cylindrical battery is selected; the battery is packaged with a metal shell, which can reduce the risk of electrolyte leakage in the battery.
  • the battery adopts a modular design, and two battery cells are connected in series and then packaged to form a battery module, wherein a plurality of the battery modules can be electrically connected in sequence (can be connected in series or in parallel). And set in the lamp, which is convenient for its maintenance in the later stage; if some battery modules are damaged, the damaged battery modules can be replaced in time without replacing all the battery modules.
  • the battery module can be arranged in a cylindrical shape, the inner diameter of which is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the battery cells, so that the battery cells are placed in the battery module in sequence, and positive and negative terminals are formed at both ends of the battery module.
  • the voltage of a plurality of battery modules connected in series is lower than 36V.
  • the battery module can be set in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the width of the rectangular parallelepiped is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the battery, so that the battery is firmly clamped in the battery module, the module is provided with a snap-type pluggable structure, or Other structures that can be easily plugged and assembled.
  • the charging unit 761/861 can be, for example, a BMS module (battery management system) that manages battery modules, mainly to intelligently manage and maintain each battery module, prevent overcharging and overdischarging of the battery, and prolong the Battery life, monitor battery status.
  • BMS module battery management system
  • the BMS module is preset with an external interface, and the information of the battery in the battery module is read by connecting to the interface during regular detection. If it is detected that the battery module is abnormal, replace the corresponding battery module.
  • the number of batteries in the battery module can be multiple, such as 3, 4, 30, etc.
  • the batteries in the battery module can be sampled in series connection, or mixed in series and parallel connection, depending on the application. If the lithium battery is used, the voltage of a single lithium battery is about 3.7V, and the number of batteries can be appropriately reduced to make the voltage of the battery system lower than 36V.
  • the relay in this embodiment is an electromagnetic relay, which is mainly composed of an iron core, a coil, an armature, a contact reed, and the like. Its working principle: as long as a certain voltage is applied to both ends of the coil, a certain current will flow in the coil, thereby generating an electromagnetic effect, and the armature will overcome the pulling force of the return spring and attract to the iron core under the action of electromagnetic attraction. Thereby, the movable contact of the armature is driven to engage with the static contact (normally open contact). When the coil is powered off, the electromagnetic suction also disappears, and the armature will return to the original position under the reaction force of the spring, so that the moving contact and the original static contact (normally closed contact) are attracted.
  • the brightness of the LED module illuminated by the external driving signal is different from the brightness illuminated by the auxiliary power.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 of this embodiment can provide auxiliary power with different power from the external driving signal to the LED module when the external driving signal is abnormal, so that the LED module has different brightness and can be used as an external power supply. Indication of whether the drive signal is normally supplied.
  • the LED module when the LED module is lit according to an external driving signal, its brightness can be, for example, 1600-2000 lumens; when the LED module is lit according to the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 , its brightness can be, for example, 200-250 lumens.
  • the output power of the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 can be, for example, 1 watt to 5 watts, but this application does not This is the limit.
  • the electric capacity of the energy storage components in the auxiliary power supply modules 760/860 can be, for example, 1.5 watt hours to more than 7.5 watt hours, so that the LED modules can be continuously lit for more than 90 minutes at a brightness of 200-250 lumens based on the auxiliary power. , but this application is also not limited to this.
  • FIG. 16I is a schematic configuration diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 (for the sake of brevity, only 760 is indicated in the drawing, and the auxiliary power supply module 760 is also described below) can be configured in the lamp tube 1 as in the previous embodiment. Besides, it can also be arranged in the base 3 . Under this configuration, the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be connected to the corresponding first pin 501 and the second pin 502 from the lamp head 3 , so as to receive the external driving signal provided to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 in this embodiment is disposed in the lamp caps 3 on both sides of the lamp tube 1 , it will be farther away from the LEDs in the lamp tube 1 .
  • the module is far away, so that the heat energy generated by the auxiliary power supply module 760 during charging and discharging is less likely to affect the operation and luminous efficacy of the LED module.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the power supply module of the LED straight tube lamp can be arranged in the same side lamp holder, or respectively placed in the two side lamp holders. Wherein, if the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the power supply module are placed in different lamp heads, the overall circuit layout can have more space.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 can also be disposed in the lamp socket corresponding to the LED straight tube lamp, as shown in FIG. 16J , which is the configuration of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application Schematic.
  • the lamp socket 1_LH includes a base 101_LH and a connection socket 102_LH, wherein the base 101_LH is equipped with a power circuit and is suitable for locking/fitting to a fixed object such as a wall or a ceiling.
  • the connection socket 102_LH has slots corresponding to the pins (eg, the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 ) on the LED straight tube lamp, wherein the slots are electrically connected to the corresponding power lines.
  • the connection socket 102_LH may be integrally formed with the base 101_LH, or may be detachably mounted on the base 101_LH, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 is disposed in the connection socket 102_LH, and is connected to a power line to receive an external driving signal. Taking the configuration of the left lamp head 3 as an example, when the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are inserted into the slot of the left connecting socket 102_LH, the auxiliary power supply module 760 will be electrically connected to the first pin through the slot. 501 and the second pin 502, thereby realizing the connection configuration as shown in FIG. 16D.
  • connection socket 102_LH can be designed to be detachable
  • the connection socket 102_LH and the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be integrated It is a modular configuration so that when the auxiliary power supply module 760 fails or expires, a new auxiliary power supply module 760 can be replaced by replacing the modular connection socket 102_LH to continue its use without replacing the entire LED Straight tube light.
  • the configuration of this embodiment not only has the advantage of reducing the influence of the thermal energy generated by the auxiliary power supply module 760 on the LED module, but also makes the replacement of the auxiliary power supply module 760 easier through the modular design, without the need for The entire LED straight tube lamp needs to be replaced due to a problem with the auxiliary power supply module 760, so as to improve the durability of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 may also be disposed in the base 101_LH of the lamp socket 1_LH, or disposed outside the lamp socket 1_LH, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be divided into two configuration modes: (1) integrated inside the LED straight tube light, and (2) independent of the outside of the LED straight tube light.
  • the power supply of the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the external power grid can be supplied to the LED straight tube light through different pins. Or give it to the LED straight tube light by sharing at least one pin.
  • the power signal from the external power grid will not be directly supplied to the pins of the LED straight tube light, but will be supplied to the auxiliary power supply module 760 first, and then The auxiliary power supply module 760 sends a signal to the power module inside the LED straight tube light through the pins of the LED straight tube light.
  • the auxiliary power supply module (referred to as the independent auxiliary power supply module) that is independent from the outside of the LED straight tube light and the overall configuration of the LED straight tube light.
  • FIG. 16K is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube light lighting system includes the LED straight tube light 600 and an auxiliary power supply module 960 .
  • the LED straight tube lamp 600 of this embodiment includes rectifier circuits 510 and 540 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an LED module (not shown).
  • the rectifier circuits 510 and 540 may be the full-wave rectifier circuit 610 shown in FIG. 11A or the half-wave rectifier circuit 710 shown in FIG. 11B , wherein the two input ends of the rectifier circuit 510 are respectively connected to the first pin 501 and the first pin 501 and the first pin 501 .
  • the LED straight tube lamp 600 is configured with double-ended power supply as an example, the external power grid 508 is connected to the pins 501 and 503 on the lamp caps on both sides of the LED straight tube lamp 600, and the auxiliary power supply module 960 is Connect to the pins 502 and 504 on the lamp caps on both sides of the LED straight tube lamp 600 . That is, the external power grid 508 and the auxiliary power supply module 960 supply power to the LED straight tube lamp 600 through different pins.
  • this embodiment is shown as an example of the configuration of double-ended power feeding, the present application is not limited to this.
  • the external power grid 508 can also supply power through the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 on the same side of the lamp holder (ie, the configuration of single-ended power feeding).
  • the auxiliary power supply module 960 can supply power through the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 on the other side of the lamp holder.
  • the unused pins (such as 502 and 504) of the LED straight tube lamp 600 can be used as receivers. The interface of the auxiliary power supply, and then realize the integration of the emergency lighting function in the LED straight tube light 600 .
  • FIG. 16L is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube light lighting system includes the LED straight tube light 700 and the auxiliary power supply module 1060 .
  • the LED straight tube lamp 700 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 and an LED module (not shown).
  • the rectifier circuit 510 can be, for example, a rectifier circuit 910 with three bridge arms as shown in one of FIGS. 11D to 11F , wherein the rectifier circuit 510 has three input signal receiving terminals P1 , P2 and P3 .
  • the input signal receiving end P1 is connected to the first pin 501
  • the input signal receiving end P2 is connected to the second pin 502, and is suitable for connecting the auxiliary power supply module 1060 through the second pin 502
  • the input signal receiving end P3 is suitable for passing through
  • the third pin 503 is connected to the auxiliary power supply module 1060 .
  • the LED straight tube lamp 700 is also configured with double-ended power supply as an example.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 1060 of this embodiment not only connects to the second pin 502 but also shares the third pin 503 with the external power grid 508 .
  • the power provided by the external power grid 508 is supplied to the signal receiving terminals P1 and P3 of the rectifier circuit 510 through the first pin 501 and the third pin 503, and the power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 1060 is provided by the first pin 501 and the third pin 503.
  • the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 are supplied to the signal receiving ends P2 and P3 of the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 1060 is connected to the external power grid 508 .
  • Neutral (N) is shared, while live is separate.
  • the signal receiving end P3 is the shared end of the external power grid 508 and the auxiliary power supply module 1060 .
  • the rectifier circuit 510 can perform full-wave rectification through the bridge arms corresponding to the signal receiving terminals P1 and P3, so as to supply power to the LED module.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 can receive the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 1060 through the signal receiving terminals P2 and P3, so as to supply power to the LED module.
  • the diode unidirectional conduction characteristic of the rectifier circuit 510 isolates the external drive signal from the input of the auxiliary power supply, so that the two will not affect each other, and can also achieve the effect of providing auxiliary power when the external power grid 508 is abnormal.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 can be implemented with a fast recovery diode, so as to respond to the high frequency characteristics of the output current of the emergency power supply.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 700 since this embodiment receives the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 1060 by sharing the third pin 503, the LED straight tube lamp 700 also has an unused fourth pin ( (not shown) can be used as a signal input interface for other control functions.
  • the other control functions may be, for example, a dimming function, a communication function, a sensing function, etc., and the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the following is an example in which the LED straight tube lamp 700 further integrates the dimming control function for illustration.
  • FIG. 16M is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 800 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an LED module 50 .
  • the configuration of the LED straight tube light lighting system of this embodiment is substantially the same as that of the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 16L , the difference between the two is that the LED straight tube light lighting system of this embodiment further includes a fourth pin 504 coupled to the LED straight tube light 800 .
  • the dimming control circuit 570 can be, for example, a circuit module composed of a variable impedance component and a signal conversion circuit. The user can adjust the impedance of the variable impedance component to make the dimming control circuit 570 generate a corresponding level. After the dimming signal is converted into a signal type conforming to the format of the driving circuit 530 by the signal conversion circuit, the dimming signal is transmitted to the driving circuit 530, so that the driving circuit 530 can adjust the output to the LED based on the dimming signal. The size of the drive current of the module 50 .
  • the brightness of the LED module 50 if it is to be adjusted, it can be realized by adjusting the frequency or reference level of the driving signal; if the color temperature of the LED module 50 is to be adjusted, the brightness of the red LED unit in the LED module 50 can be adjusted. , but this application is not limited to this.
  • auxiliary power supply modules 960 and 1060 can also refer to the configurations of FIGS. 16I and 16J, and the same beneficial effects can be obtained.
  • the configurations of the embodiments of FIGS. 16D to 16M can also be applied to provide emergency auxiliary power under the structure of multiple lamps in parallel.
  • the corresponding pins of the LED straight tube lamps are connected in parallel with each other, so as to receive the same external driving signal.
  • the first pins 501 of each LED straight tube light are connected in parallel with each other, and the second pins of each LED straight tube light are connected in parallel with each other, and so on.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 can be equivalently connected to the pin of each parallel LED straight tube lamp.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 can provide auxiliary power to light up all the parallel LED lights when the external power supply is abnormal (ie, the external driving signal cannot be supplied normally).
  • the LED straight tube light is used as emergency lighting.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be designed as an energy storage unit with a capacity of 1.5Wh to 7.5Wh and an output power of 1W to 5W .
  • the whole lamp can have a brightness of at least 200-250 lumens, and can be continuously lit for 90 minutes.
  • an auxiliary power supply module may be provided in one of the lamps of the lamp, or in multiple lamps of the lamp.
  • An auxiliary power supply module is provided, wherein the configuration of the lamp tube considering the light uniformity is also applicable to this embodiment.
  • the main difference between this embodiment and the aforementioned embodiments in FIGS. 16A to 16C applied to a multi-lamp lamp structure is that even if only a single lamp is provided with an auxiliary power supply module in this embodiment, it can still supply other lamps through the auxiliary power supply module. Tube power supply.
  • the auxiliary power supply modules 560 , 660 , 760 , 960 , and 1060 of FIGS. 16D to 16M can further determine whether to provide auxiliary power for the LED straight tube light according to the one-light signal.
  • the lighting signal may be an indication signal reflecting the switching state of the light switch. For example, the level of the lighting signal will be adjusted to a first level (eg, a high logic level) or a second level (eg, a low logic level) different from the first level according to the switching of the light switch level).
  • a first level eg, a high logic level
  • a second level eg, a low logic level
  • the indicator switch when the lighting signal is at the first level, the indicator switch is switched to the ON position; when the lighting signal is at the second level, the indicator switch is switched to the OFF position.
  • the generation of the lighting signal can be realized by a circuit for detecting the switching state of the light switch.
  • the auxiliary power supply modules 560 , 660 , 760 , 860 , 960 , 1060 may further include a lighting judging circuit, which is used for receiving the lighting signal, and according to the level of the lighting signal and the detection of the voltage detection circuit The result is to decide whether to make the energy storage unit supply power to the back end.
  • the detection result based on the level of the lighting signal and the voltage detection circuit may have the following three states: (1) the lighting signal is at the first level and the external drive signal is normally provided; (2) the lighting signal is at the first level and (3) the lighting signal is at the second level and the supply of the external drive signal is stopped.
  • state (1) is when the user turns on the light switch and the external power supply is normal
  • state (2) is when the user turns on the light switch but the external power supply is abnormal
  • state (3) is when the user turns off the light switch so that the external power supply is turned off. stop offering.
  • both the state (1) and the state (3) are normal states, that is, the external power supply is normally provided when the user turns on the light and the external power supply is stopped when the user turns off the light. Therefore, in states (1) and (3), the auxiliary power supply module does not provide auxiliary power to the rear end. More specifically, the lighting judgment circuit will prevent the energy storage unit from supplying power to the back end according to the judgment results of the state (1) and the state (3).
  • the external drive signal is directly input to the rectifier circuit 510, and the external drive signal charges the energy storage unit; in state (3), the external drive signal stops providing, so the energy storage unit is not charged.
  • state (2) it means that the external power supply does not normally supply power to the LED straight tube light when the user turns on the light, so at this time, the lighting judgment circuit will make the energy storage unit supply power to the back end according to the judgment result of state (2).
  • the LED module 50 is made to emit light based on the auxiliary power provided by the energy storage unit.
  • the LED module 50 can have three different brightness changes.
  • the first segment is when the external power supply is normally powered, and the LED module 50 has the first brightness (eg, 1600-2200 lumens)
  • the second segment is when the external power supply is not normally powered and the auxiliary power is used instead, the LED module 50 has the second brightness ( For example, 200-250 lumens)
  • the third stage is that the user turns off the power by himself, so that the external power is not provided to the LED straight tube light, at this time, the LED module 50 has the third brightness (the LED module is not lit).
  • the lighting judgment circuit can be, for example, a switch circuit (not shown) connected in series between the auxiliary power positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power negative terminal 662 .
  • the control terminal receives the lighting signal.
  • the switch circuit will be turned on in response to the lighting signal, and then when the external driving signal is normally supplied, the auxiliary power supply positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power supply negative terminal 662 are connected to the energy storage unit.
  • the energy storage unit 663 can provide auxiliary power to the rear LED module 50 via the auxiliary power positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power negative terminal 662 for use (state 2).
  • the switch circuit will be turned off in response to the lighting signal. At this time, even if the external driving signal stops being supplied or the AC level is insufficient, the energy storage unit 663 will not affect the rear end. Provide auxiliary power.
  • the circuit of the auxiliary power supply unit (such as 762 and 862) is designed to be open-loop control, that is, the output voltage of the auxiliary power supply unit has no feedback signal. If the load is open, it will cause the auxiliary power supply module. The output voltage keeps rising and burns out.
  • the present disclosure proposes a plurality of circuit embodiments of auxiliary power supply modules with open-circuit protection, as shown in FIG. 16N and FIG. 16O .
  • FIG. 16N is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 1160 includes a charging unit 1161 and an auxiliary power supply unit 1162 , wherein the auxiliary power supply unit 1162 includes an energy storage unit 1163 for supplying a voltage Vcc, a transformer, a sampling module 1164 and a chip control module 1165 .
  • the transformer includes a primary winding component L1 and a secondary winding component L2.
  • the sampling module 1164 includes a winding L3, and the winding L3 and the secondary winding assembly L2 are wound on the secondary side; the voltage of the secondary winding assembly L2 is sampled through the winding L3, and if the sampled voltage exceeds the set threshold, it is fed back to the chip control module , the switching frequency of the switch M1 electrically connected to the primary winding assembly L1 is adjusted by the chip control module. Then, the output voltage of the secondary side is controlled, so as to achieve the purpose of open circuit protection.
  • the transformer has a primary side unit and a secondary side unit, and the primary side unit includes an energy storage unit 1163 , a primary winding component L1 and a switch M1 .
  • the positive pole of the energy storage unit 1163 is electrically connected to the same-named terminal (ie, the dot terminal) of the primary winding assembly L1, and the negative pole of the energy storage unit 1163 is electrically connected to the ground terminal.
  • the opposite end of the primary winding element L1 is electrically connected to the drain of the switch M1 (take MOS as an example).
  • the gate of the switch M1 is electrically connected to the chip control module 1165 , and the source of the switch M1 is connected to the ground terminal.
  • the secondary side unit includes a secondary winding component L2, a diode D1 and a capacitor C1.
  • the opposite end of the secondary winding component L2 is electrically connected to the anode of the diode D1, and the identical end of the secondary winding component L2 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C1.
  • the cathode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C1.
  • Both ends of the capacitor C1 constitute auxiliary power output terminals V1 and V2 (equivalent to both ends of the auxiliary power supply module 960 in FIG. 16K or both ends of the auxiliary power supply module 1060 in FIGS. 16L and 16M).
  • the sampling module 1164 includes a third winding element L3, a diode D2, a capacitor C2 and a resistor R1.
  • the opposite end of the third winding element L3 is electrically connected to the anode of the diode D2, and the identical end of the third winding element L3 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2 and the resistor R1.
  • the cathode of the diode D2 is electrically connected to the other end (ie, the A end) of the capacitor C2 and the resistor R1.
  • the capacitor C2 and the resistor R1 are electrically connected to the chip control module 1165 through the A terminal.
  • the chip control module 1165 includes a chip 1166, a diode D3, capacitors C3-C5 and resistors R2-R4.
  • the ground terminal (GT) of the chip 1166 is grounded; the output terminal (OUT) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to the gate of the switch M1; the trigger terminal (TRIG) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to one end (B terminal) of the resistor R2, and the chip 1166
  • the discharge terminal (DIS) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor R2; the reset terminal (RST) and the control constant voltage terminal (CV) terminal of the chip 1166 are respectively electrically connected to the capacitors C3 and C4 and then grounded; the discharge terminal (DIS) of the chip 1166 ) is electrically connected to the capacitor C5 through the resistor R2 and then grounded.
  • the power supply terminal (VC terminal) of the chip 1166 receives the voltage Vcc and is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R3; the other end of the resistor R3 is electrically connected to the B terminal.
  • the anode of the diode D3 is electrically connected to the A terminal
  • the cathode of the diode D3 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R4
  • the other end of the resistor R4 is electrically connected to the B terminal.
  • the output voltage between the output terminals V1 and V2 of the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is relatively low, usually lower than a certain value (such as lower than 100V, In this implementation, the voltage between V1 and V2 is 60V-80V).
  • the sampling-to-ground voltage of point A in the sampling module 1164 is low, and a small current (negligible) flows through the resistor R4.
  • the voltage between the nodes V1 and V2 of the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is relatively high (for example, more than 300V), and the sampling voltage of the point A in the sampling module 1164 is high, and a relatively high voltage flows through the resistor R4. Due to the large current flowing, the discharge time of the capacitor C5 becomes longer, but the charging time of the capacitor C5 does not change; it is equivalent to adjusting the duty cycle of the switch; thus prolonging the cut-off time of the switch M1. For the output side of the transformer, the output energy becomes smaller and the output voltage no longer rises, thus achieving the purpose of open-circuit protection.
  • the trigger terminal (TRIG) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to the resistor R2 branch and then electrically connected to the discharge terminal DIS terminal.
  • the DIS terminal is triggered. If the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is working in a normal state (that is, the output voltage does not exceed the set threshold), the voltage of the A terminal can be less than 1/3Vcc; if the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is abnormal, the voltage of the A point can reach or even exceed 1/2Vcc .
  • the output terminal OUT of the chip 1166 When the discharge terminal DIS of the chip 1166 is triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is in the discharge stage), the output terminal OUT of the chip will output a low-level signal, and when the discharge terminal DIS of the chip 1166 is not triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is in the discharge stage) In the charging stage), the output terminal OUT of the chip 1166 will output a high level. In this way, the chip 1166 can control the on/off of the switch M1 through the high/low level of the signal output by the output terminal OUT.
  • FIG. 16Q is a timing diagram of the discharge terminal DIS in the chip 1166 charging and discharging and the output terminal when the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is in an abnormal state. It can be seen from the timing sequence that no matter whether the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is in a normal state, the time required to charge the capacitor C5 is the same; when it is in an abnormal state, since there is current flowing into the discharge terminal DIS through the B terminal, this is equivalent to prolonging the discharge time of the capacitor C5 , so that the output energy becomes smaller, and the output voltage is no longer increased, so as to achieve the purpose of open circuit protection.
  • the chip control module 1166 can select a chip with a time adjustment function (eg, a 555 timing chip); and then controls the cut-off time of the switch M1.
  • a time adjustment function eg, a 555 timing chip
  • the above scheme only needs simple resistors and capacitors to realize the delay effect. No complicated control algorithms are required.
  • the voltage range of the voltage Vcc in the above scheme is between 4.5V-16V.
  • the open circuit voltage of the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is limited to be below a certain value (eg, below 300V, the specific value can be determined by selecting appropriate parameters).
  • FIG. 16O is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 1260 includes a charging unit 1261 and an auxiliary power supply unit 1262, wherein the auxiliary power supply unit 1262 includes an energy storage unit 1263 that provides a voltage Vcc, a transformer, a sampling module 1264, and a chip control module 1265.
  • the sampling module 1264 in this embodiment is implemented by using an optocoupler sensor.
  • the transformer includes a primary winding component L1 and a secondary winding component L2.
  • the configuration of the primary winding assembly L1 and the switch M1 is the same as that of the previous embodiment.
  • the same-named end of the secondary winding element L2 is electrically connected to the anode of the diode D1, and the different-named end of the secondary winding element L2 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C1.
  • the cathode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C1.
  • the two ends of the capacitor C1 are the auxiliary power output terminals V1 and V2.
  • the sampling module 1264 includes an optocoupler PD, the anode side of the photodiode in the optocoupler PD is electrically connected to the cathode of the diode D1 and one end of the capacitor C1, the cathode side of the photodiode is electrically connected to one side of the resistor R4, and the resistor R4
  • the other side of the clamp is electrically connected to one end of the clamping component Rcv, and the other end of the clamping component Rcv is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C1.
  • the collector and the emitter of the triode in the optocoupler PD are electrically connected to both ends of the resistor R3, respectively.
  • the chip control module 1265 includes a chip 1266, capacitors C3-C5, and resistors R2 and R3.
  • the power supply terminal (VC terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to the voltage Vcc and the collector of the triode in the optocoupler PD; the discharge terminal (DIS terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the other end of the resistor R2 is electrically connected Connect the emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD;
  • the sampling terminal (THRS terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to the emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD and is electrically grounded through the capacitor C5;
  • the ground terminal (GT terminal) of the chip 1266 ) is electrically grounded;
  • the reset terminal (RST) of the chip 1266 is electrically grounded through the capacitor C3; the constant voltage terminal (CV terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically grounded through the capacitor C4; the trigger terminal (TRIG) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected
  • the output voltage of the auxiliary power supply output terminals (V1, V2) is lower than the clamping voltage of the clamping voltage component Rcv, and the current I1 flowing through the resistor R4 is very small and can be ignored. ;
  • the current I2 flowing through the collector and emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD is very small.
  • the output voltage of the auxiliary power supply output terminals (V1, V2) rises, and when the threshold value of the clamping component Rcv is exceeded, the clamping component Rcv is turned on, so that the current I1 flowing through the current limiting resistor R4 increases, making the optocoupler
  • the PD diode emits light, and the current I2 flowing through the collector and emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD increases proportionally.
  • the current I2 compensates the discharge current of the capacitor C5 through the resistor R2, so that the discharge time of the capacitor C5 is prolonged, so that the corresponding The turn-off time of the switch is lengthened (that is, the duty cycle of the switch is reduced), the output energy is reduced, the output energy of the secondary side is correspondingly reduced, and the output voltage is no longer increased, thereby realizing open-circuit protection.
  • the clamping voltage component Rcv is a varistor, a TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor diode, also known as a transient suppression diode), and a Zener diode.
  • the triggering threshold of the clamping voltage component Rcv is 100V-400V, preferably 150V-350V. In this embodiment, 300V is selected.
  • the resistor R4 is mainly used for its current limiting function, and its resistance value is 20K ohm-1M ohm, preferably 20K ohm-500KM ohm, and 50K ohm in this embodiment.
  • resistance R3 is mainly its current limiting effect, and its resistance value selects 1K ohm-100K ohm, preferably 5K ohm-50KM ohm, and in the present embodiment, selects 6K ohm.
  • the capacitance value of the capacitor C5 is 1nF-1000nF, preferably 1nF-100nF, and 2.2nF in this embodiment.
  • the capacitance value of the capacitor C4 is 1nF-1pF, preferably 5nF-50nF, and 10nF in this embodiment.
  • the capacitance value of the capacitor C1 is 1uF-100uF, preferably 1uF-10uF, and 4.7uF in this embodiment.
  • the energy storage unit 1263 included in the auxiliary power supply module 1160/1260 may be a battery or a super capacitor.
  • the DC power supply of the auxiliary power supply module 1160/1260 can be managed by a BMS (battery management system), and it can be charged in the general lighting mode. Or simply omit the BMS and charge the DC power supply in normal lighting mode. By selecting appropriate component parameters, charging is performed with a small current (current not exceeding 300mA).
  • auxiliary power supply module 1160/1260 of the embodiment of FIG. 16N or 16O its circuit topology is simple, and no dedicated integrated chip is required. Open circuit protection is achieved with fewer components. Improve the reliability of the ballast. In addition, the emergency ballast of this scheme has an output isolation type circuit topology. Reduce the hidden danger of leakage current.
  • the principle of the solutions shown in Figure 16N and Figure 16O is that the detection module is used to sample the voltage (current) information of the output terminal. If the detected information exceeds the set threshold, the discharge time of the discharge terminal of the control chip is extended to prolong the The turn-off time of the switch is used to adjust the duty cycle of the switch (for the control chip, the working voltage of the discharge terminal (DIS) and/or the sampling terminal (THRS) is between 1/3Vcc-2/3Vcc, and the working capacitor C5 For the output side of the transformer, the output energy becomes smaller and the output voltage does not increase, thus achieving the purpose of open circuit protection.
  • FIG. 16P and FIG. 16Q are timing diagrams of triggering of the output terminal OUT and the discharge terminal DIS when the output terminal OUT of the chip initially outputs a high level.
  • 16P is a signal timing diagram of the auxiliary power supply module of an embodiment of the present application when it is in a normal state
  • FIG. 16Q is a signal timing diagram of the auxiliary power supply module of an embodiment of the present application when it is in an abnormal state (eg, open load).
  • the output terminal OUT of the chip 1266 initially outputs a high level. At this time, the discharge terminal DIS is not triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is charged); when the discharge terminal DIS is triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is discharged), the output terminal OUT starts to output a low level. .
  • the chip 1266 controls the on/off of the switch M1 through the signal of the output terminal OUT.
  • a surge protection circuit is further provided on the power supply circuit where the power supply device and the load circuit are located.
  • the surge protection circuit performs surge protection processing on the surge signal superimposed on the external drive signal by filtering out high-frequency signals, discharging excess energy, or temporarily storing excess energy and releasing it slowly.
  • the following takes the circuit structure of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system as an example to illustrate an example circuit structure in which the surge protection circuit is included.
  • FIG. 49A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED lighting system of this embodiment includes an LED straight tube lamp 1700 and a surge protection circuit 520'.
  • the LED straight tube light 1700 is, for example, the LED straight tube light 500, 600, 700 or 800 described in the previous embodiments, and the LED straight tube light 1700 includes a power module 5 and an LED module 50, wherein the power module 5 can be, for example, using
  • the circuit structure of the power module corresponding to the LED straight tube lamp 500, 600, 700 or 800 can also be omitted.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' of this embodiment is disposed outside the LED straight tube lamp 1700, on the power supply line of the power input source, for example, in the lamp socket, and the surge protection circuit 520' is used to receive external driving signals.
  • the external driving signal may be the AC power signal provided by the external power grid 508 in FIG. 8A to FIG. 8E , the electric signal provided by the ballast, or even the DC signal.
  • the surge protection circuit 520 ′ reduces the influence of the surge on the LED straight tube lamp 1700 .
  • the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is not limited to the application in the LED straight tube lamp lighting system shown in FIG. 49A . In other embodiments, the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is coupled to the rear stage.
  • the LED straight tube light 1700 can also be replaced with other load circuits, and other load circuits can also be electronic devices that use external drive signals to work, such as televisions, smart terminals, electric toys and other electrical devices.
  • the configuration structure and working principle of the surge protection circuit will also be described by taking the LED straight tube lamp as an example, which should not be construed as a limitation on the application of the surge protection circuit.
  • FIG. 49B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment mainly discloses the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the LED lighting system.
  • the input end of the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is coupled to the power of the power input source
  • the input terminal A1 and the output terminal are used for coupling to the pin of the LED straight tube lamp 1700 corresponding to the power input terminal A1 for processing the external driving signal output by the power input terminal A1.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 1700 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the surge protection circuit 520' and the power input terminal A2, respectively.
  • the surge is generally a sudden voltage signal.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' detects the surge signal and turns on the surge discharge circuit to discharge the surge energy. , reduce the impact of surge on the LED straight tube lamp 1700.
  • the power input terminals A1 and A2 can be the live wire (L) and the neutral wire (N) of the commercial power, respectively; when the power input source is a ballast, the power input terminals A1 and A2 can be the two output ends of the ballast, and the power input ends A1 and A2 mentioned later are all understood in this way, and will not be repeated here.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' is connected in series with the power supply circuit. When a surge passes through the surge protection circuit 520', a potential difference will be formed on both sides of the surge protection circuit 520'. This potential The difference causes the surge protection circuit 520' to activate the surge protection function.
  • the connection method of the surge protection circuit 520' is not limited thereto.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' is connected in parallel with the power supply circuit, that is, the input end of the surge protection circuit 520' is electrically connected to the power The input terminal A1 and the output terminal are electrically connected to the power input terminal A2. The surge will form a sudden potential difference between the power input terminals A1 and A2.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' causes the surge protection circuit 520' to conduct the energy discharge circuit to Discharge surge energy and reduce the impact of surge on subsequent circuits.
  • the power supply circuit in the foregoing embodiments refers to the path through which the power input source transmits current to the load (eg, the LED module 50 ).
  • the path for transmitting current between the two and the path for transmitting current from the power supply module 5 in the LED straight tube lamp to the LED module 50 is also understood as the power supply circuit mentioned later, and will not be repeated.
  • FIG. 49C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment mainly discloses the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the LED lighting system.
  • the surge protection circuit includes a first surge protection circuit 520a ′ and a second surge protection circuit 520a ′. Two surge protection circuits 520b'.
  • the input end of the first surge protection circuit 520a' is coupled to the power input end A1, the output end is used for coupling to the pin of the LED straight tube lamp 1700 corresponding to the power input end A1, and the second surge protection circuit 520b'
  • the input end is coupled to the power output end A2, and the output end is used for coupling to the pin of the LED straight tube lamp 1700 corresponding to the power input end A2.
  • the external driving signals output by the power input terminals A1 and A2 are processed by the surge protection circuit to reduce the influence of the surge on the LED straight tube lamp 1700 .
  • the above examples can be easily matched with a power supply module that has not yet integrated a surge protection circuit.
  • the surge protection circuit By externally connecting the surge protection circuit between the power supply module and the power input source, for example, it is set in the lamp holder of the LED straight tube lamp to effectively Improve the surge protection function of the load circuit.
  • the surge protection circuit can also be used as a part of the power module to realize the surge protection function. The following takes the power modules shown in FIGS. The configuration method is explained.
  • FIG. 50A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube light 1800 directly receives an external driving signal provided by a power input source, and the external driving signal is supplied to the corresponding pins of the LED straight tube light 1800 through the power input terminals A1 and A2.
  • the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is disposed in the LED straight tube lamp 1800 as a part of the power module 5 of the LED straight tube lamp 1800 .
  • the power supply module of the LED straight tube light 500, 600, 700, 800, or 1700 in the example has a surge protection circuit 520' added.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' absorbs the surge therein so as to reduce the influence on the subsequent circuit.
  • the power supply module 5 can not only adopt the circuit structure of the power supply module corresponding to the LED straight tube lamp 500, 600, 700 or 800, but also can be omitted.
  • the following embodiments are mainly to illustrate the location of the surge protection circuit 520', not for the power module 5 Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 50A to 50E , dashed lines are used to indicate circuit units or components that may also appear in the power supply module 5 .
  • FIG. 50B is a circuit block diagram illustrating the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 includes a surge protection circuit 520 ′ in addition to the rectification circuit 510 .
  • the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is connected in series to the power supply line connected to the first rectification output end 511 of the rectification circuit 510 to receive the rectified signal.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' performs surge protection processing on the surge signal to reduce the impact of the surge on the subsequent circuit.
  • FIG. 50C is a circuit block diagram illustrating the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the surge protection circuit includes a first surge protection circuit 520a' and a second surge protection circuit 520b'.
  • the first surge protection circuit 520 a ′ is connected in series to the first rectifier output end 511 of the rectifier circuit 510
  • the second surge protection circuit 522 ′ is connected in series to the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 . That is, the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 are simultaneously connected with a surge protection circuit.
  • the surge protection circuit will process it to reduce the impact of the surge on the subsequent circuit.
  • FIG. 50D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is connected in series between the first pin 501 and the rectifier circuit 510 to receive an external driving signal, and the rectifier circuit 510 The first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 are connected to the subsequent circuit.
  • the external driving signal is output to the surge protection circuit 520 ′ through the power input terminal A1 through the first pin 501 .
  • the surge protection circuit 520' can absorb the surge energy in the signal and output it to the rectifier circuit 510 for subsequent processing, thereby reducing the impact of the surge on the The effect of LED straight tube lights.
  • FIG. 50E is a circuit block diagram illustrating a configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the first surge protection circuit 520a' is connected in series between the first pin 501 and the rectifier circuit 510
  • the second surge protection circuit 520b' is connected in series
  • the rectifier circuit is connected to its subsequent circuit via the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 . That is, the surge protection circuit simultaneously receives the external driving signal input through the power input terminal A1 and the power input terminal A2.
  • the first surge protection circuit 520a' Process it to reduce the impact of surge on the subsequent circuit; when there is a surge in the external driving signal input through the power input terminal A2, the second surge protection circuit 520b' processes it to reduce the surge Impact on the post-stage circuit.
  • the first and second surge protection circuits (520a', 520b') output the processed external driving signals to the rectifier circuit 510 for subsequent processing, thereby reducing the impact of surges on the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the power supply module 5 shown in FIGS. 50B to 50E above are only examples of how the surge protection circuit is configured in the power supply module.
  • the power supply module 5 shown in FIGS. 50B to 50E can directly supply power to the load output, or the power supply
  • the module 5 also includes other circuits to achieve stable power supply to the load.
  • the first rectifier output end 512 or the output end of the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is connected to other power supply modules 5 .
  • the circuit is connected to provide stable power supply to subsequent LED modules. Examples of other circuits include filter circuits as described in FIG. 12B , FIG. 12C , or FIG. 12H , and drive circuits as described in FIGS.
  • the surge protection circuit can also be coupled to the back end of the filter circuit, or the surge protection circuit and the filter circuit are integrated as an integral unit to make the circuit structure simpler and more compact .
  • the filter circuit and the drive circuit in the power module can also be replaced with the circuits/components required for the power supply of other loads, and the load LED module is Replace with other loads. Taking a fluorescent lamp as the load as an example, the load LED module 50 in FIGS. 50B to 50E is replaced with a fluorescent lamp module and connected to the power module 5 .
  • FIG. 51 is a schematic block diagram of the surge protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the surge protection circuit 620 ′ has an input end 623 ′ and an output end 624 ′.
  • the surge protection circuit 620 ′ includes Inductive circuit 621' and energy discharge circuit 622'.
  • the inductive circuit 621 ′ is coupled in the power supply loop through the input end 623 ′ and the output end 624 ′ of the surge protection circuit 620 ′ (as shown in FIG. 49A to FIG. 49C or FIG. 50A to FIG. 50E ). It is used to receive and temporarily store the surge energy in the power supply circuit.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' is connected to the input terminal 623' and the output terminal 624' of the surge protection circuit 620' in parallel with the inductive circuit 621', for discharging the surge energy in the power supply circuit In order to avoid the impact of surge energy on the subsequent circuit.
  • the surge energy will enter the power supply loop along with the external drive signal, and the inductive circuit 621' receives and stores the surge energy to form a potential difference (or This potential difference will make the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ conduct to form an energy discharge path, so that the surge energy can reduce the current/voltage impact of the surge signal on the subsequent circuit through the energy discharge path.
  • the conduction of the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ to form an energy discharge path means that the line where the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ is located discharges the energy carried by the surge signal.
  • turning off the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ without forming an energy discharge path means that the circuit where the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ is located prevents the current from passing due to an open circuit or a high impedance state.
  • the use of the inductive circuit 621 ′ has the inductive characteristic of suppressing current changes, and the temporary storage refers to the process that the inductive circuit 621 ′ performs an excitation operation to store energy during the period when the surge energy flows, and when the surge signal leaves the inductive This portion of the stored energy is released during demagnetization of circuit 621'.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' provides a release path for the surge energy, so that the surge energy is absorbed, so as to avoid being output to the subsequent circuit.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ is connected in parallel with the inductive circuit 621 ′.
  • the inductive circuit 621 ′ stores the energy at the input end of the surge protection circuit 620 ′.
  • a forward potential difference is created between 623' and output 624', and a reverse potential difference is created between input 623' and output 624' of surge protection circuit 620' during the discharge of energy from inductive circuit 621'.
  • both the energy discharge circuit 622' can be turned on under the action of the forward potential difference and the reverse potential difference, then in the forward potential difference stage, the energy discharge circuit 622' can discharge For part of the surge energy, in the reverse potential difference stage, the energy discharge circuit will further discharge the part of the surge energy temporarily stored by the inductive circuit 621'. If the energy discharge circuit 622' is turned on under the action of the reverse potential difference, the energy discharge circuit 622' discharges all the surge energy temporarily stored in the inductive circuit 621' to avoid The effect of surge energy on subsequent circuits.
  • FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram of the potential difference of the inductive circuit in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Vab represents the potential difference between the input terminal 623' and the output terminal 624' of the surge protection circuit.
  • the first stage ST1 also called the forward potential difference stage
  • the surge energy flows from the input terminal 623' of the surge protection circuit 621' into the inductive circuit 621', and the potential of the input terminal 623' is instantly pulled
  • the potential of the input terminal 623' is higher than the potential of the output terminal 624'.
  • the potential difference formed between the two ends of the inductive circuit 621' is called the forward potential difference.
  • the second stage ST1 also called the reverse potential difference stage
  • the surge energy leaves through the inductive circuit 621 ′, so that the potential of the output terminal 624 ′ is higher than the potential of the input terminal 623 ′.
  • the inductive circuit 621 The potential difference formed at both ends is called the reverse potential difference. That is to say, the energy discharge circuit 622' in FIG. 51 may be configured to be turned on in the first stage ST1 or the second stage ST2 to form an energy discharge path to discharge the surge energy.
  • the energy discharge circuit 112 When the potential difference between the two ends of the energy discharge circuit 622' is greater than the set voltage threshold, the energy discharge circuit 112 is converted from a high resistance state to a low resistance state, and the energy discharge circuit is turned on to discharge the surge energy, thereby reducing the surge energy.
  • the set voltage threshold can be determined by circuit/element characteristic parameters of the energy discharge circuit itself.
  • the inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance that suppresses current variation.
  • the inductive circuit 621' includes, for example, a differential mode inductor.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' includes a voltage control component (not shown) that is turned on or off in response to a potential difference across the surge protection circuit.
  • the voltage control component DBs1 has the characteristic of being turned on when the voltage difference between the two ends of the surge protection circuit reaches a voltage threshold, and turned off when the voltage threshold is not reached, examples of which include discharge tubes, An electronic component having the above characteristics exemplified by any one of a varistor, a transient suppression diode (TVS), etc., or a control circuit structure exemplified by a circuit structure such as a comparator and a switch.
  • the power supply signal output by the power module contains higher energy
  • the surge protection circuit further includes a current limiting component (not shown), which is connected in series with the voltage control assembly for controlling the transmission direction of the surge energy.
  • the current limiting component is used to limit the energy discharge circuit 622' to be turned on during the forward potential difference (or reverse potential difference), and turned off during the reverse potential difference (or forward potential difference). Examples of the current limiting components include diodes.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' includes a varistor and a diode (neither shown) connected in series, wherein the anode of the diode is connected to the output terminal 624' of the surge protection circuit 620', and the cathode is connected to the varistor, and so on The situation where the line where the energy discharge circuit 622' is located is turned on during the reverse potential difference is formed.
  • the surge protection circuit Due to the characteristic of the inductive circuit 621 ′ that suppresses current variation, the surge protection circuit also has a filtering function.
  • the surge protection circuit in this application is further integrated with a filter circuit; or, according to the signal stability requirements of the output power supply signal of the circuit structure where the power module is located, the surge protection circuit can also be Set up separately from the filter circuit.
  • a filter circuit for removing the ripple signal is arranged on the LED module side.
  • the circuit structure and working principle of the surge protection circuit will be described by taking as an example that the filter circuit is not provided outside the surge protection circuit in the power module.
  • the external drive signal enters the rectifier circuit 510 through the first pin 501 and the second pin 502, and the rectifier circuit 510 rectifies the external drive signal to output a rectified signal. If the external driving signal does not contain surge energy, the rectified signal is directly filtered by some circuit units or some circuit components in the surge protection circuit, and then output to the rear-stage driving circuit 530, where the filtered signal is filtered by the driving circuit 530. The signal is converted into a driving signal to drive the LED module 50 to work normally.
  • the rectified signal also contains surge energy, which is output to the surge protection circuit. After the surge protection circuit absorbs and discharges the surge energy, it is output to the drive circuit. 530 , the filtered signal is converted into a driving signal by the driving circuit 530 to drive the LED module 50 to work normally.
  • other circuit components can also be added to the power modules shown in FIGS. 53A to 53I as required, such as the filter shown in FIGS. 12B , 12C, and 12F to 12H. circuit, or share some components with the filter circuits shown in 12B, 12C, 12F to 12H.
  • the driving circuits in 53A to 53I can also be replaced with the circuits/components required for the power supply of other loads, or omitted, or in the previous stage of the driving circuit. Or add other circuit components suitable for the load in the latter stage.
  • FIG. 53A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the surge protection circuit 620 ′ is configured to include an inductive circuit 621 ′ and an energy discharge circuit 622 ′.
  • the inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance L1.
  • the first end of the inductor L1 is connected to the first rectification output end 511 of the rectifier circuit 510 , and the second end is connected to the driving circuit 530 .
  • the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are respectively used for correspondingly coupled to the power input terminals A1 and A2 so that the rectifier circuit 510 can obtain an external driving signal.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' includes a voltage control component DBs1, and the voltage control component DBs1 is connected in parallel to the a terminal and the b terminal of the inductive circuit 621', for turning on or off in response to the voltage difference between the two ends of the inductance L1, specifically, When the potential difference between the two ends of the inductor L1 is greater than the threshold voltage of the energy discharge circuit 622', it is turned on.
  • the threshold voltage of the energy discharge circuit 622' can be regarded as the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBs1 (this The threshold voltage is determined by the component parameters of the voltage control component BD1), and it is turned on, thereby forming an energy discharge path.
  • the voltage control component DBs1 as the discharge tube as an example, when the potential difference between the two ends of the inductor L1 is greater than the threshold voltage of the discharge tube (for example, a discharge tube with a threshold voltage between 50V and 200V can be selected), the discharge tube is turned on, and the surge occurs. It can be discharged through the discharge tube, thereby reducing the impact of surge on the subsequent circuit.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration, and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 620' can be interchanged.
  • the surge protection circuit 620' is connected to the first pin 501 in series without affecting the surge. Circuit characteristics of the guard circuit 620'.
  • FIG. 53B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the surge protection circuit 620 ′ is configured to include an inductive circuit 621 ′ and an energy discharge circuit 622 ′.
  • the energy discharge circuit in this embodiment further includes a current limiting component D1, and the blocking component D1 and the voltage control component DBS1 are connected in series to control the surge energy when discharging. current direction, so that the voltage control component DBS1 can only be turned on in a specific state.
  • the voltage of the first end of the inductor L1 (that is, the end connected to the first rectifier output end 511 ) is greater than that of the second end (that is, the first end 511 ).
  • the voltage at one end connected to the driving circuit 530) exceeds the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBS1 (ie, the forward potential difference), or the voltage at the second end of the inductor L1 is greater than the voltage at the first end and exceeds the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBS1 (that is, the reverse potential difference), the voltage control component DBS1 will enter the conducting state.
  • the threshold voltage of the energy discharge circuit 622' is the voltage control component DBS1 and the sum of the threshold voltage of the blocking component D1
  • the current limiting component D1 will be in a conducting state, so that one end connected to the voltage control component DBS1 and the current limiting component D1 is equivalent to being electrically connected to the second end of the inductor L1, Then, the voltage control component DBS1 is turned on in response to the reverse potential difference, forming an energy discharge path to discharge/consume the surge energy.
  • the current limiting component D1 may be implemented using a diode (described below as diode D1 ).
  • the anode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor L1 , and the cathode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the voltage control element DBS1 .
  • the diode D1 when the potential difference is the forward potential difference, the diode D1 is in a reverse bias state (reverse bias), so the diode D1 will remain off to make one end of the voltage control component DBS1 float; when the potential difference is the reverse potential difference When , the diode D1 can be in a forward bias state, so the diode D1 is turned on so that one end of the voltage control element DBS1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor L1 .
  • reverse bias reverse bias
  • the cathode of the diode D1 can also be electrically connected to the first end of the inductor L1, and the anode of the diode D1 can be electrically connected to the voltage control component DBS1, which does not change its working principle.
  • the advantage of adding a current-limiting component to the energy discharge circuit above is that no matter how the surge protection circuit handles the surge in the forward potential difference stage ST1, it can also effectively deal with the surge through the reverse potential difference stage ST2. deal with. For example, the surge that is not effectively eliminated in the forward potential difference stage ST1 is absorbed in the reverse potential difference stage ST2, so that the reliability of the surge protection circuit can be effectively improved. For example, there is a continuous surge in the circuit. If the energy discharge circuit is configured to conduct the energy discharge circuit in the forward potential difference stage ST1, the subsequent surge can also be conducted to the subsequent stage through the energy discharge circuit. level affects. By adding a current limiting component, the reverse potential difference formed by the continuous surge on the inductor L1 can be turned on to form an energy discharge path, and the surge energy can be discharged through the energy discharge path, thereby improving the reliability of the surge protection circuit. .
  • FIG. 53C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53A .
  • the circuit is configured at the first rectification output end 511 and the second rectification output end 512 of the rectification circuit 510 at the same time.
  • the inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance L1a and an inductance L1b.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' includes voltage control components DBs1a and DBs1b.
  • the first end of the inductor L1a is coupled to the first rectification output end 511 , the second end is coupled to the driving circuit 530 , the first end of the inductor L1b is coupled to the second rectified output end 512 , and the second end is coupled to the driving circuit 530 .
  • the voltage control component DBs1a is connected in parallel with the inductor L1a, and the voltage control component DBs1b is connected in parallel with the inductor L1b.
  • the voltage control component DBs1a When the potential difference between the two ends of the inductor L1a is greater than the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBs1a, the voltage control component DBs1a is turned on. When the potential difference between the two ends of L1b is greater than the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBs1b, the voltage control component DBs1b is turned on, and the surge can be discharged through the voltage control component DBs1a and the voltage control component DBs1b, thereby reducing the impact of the surge on the subsequent circuit. influences.
  • the inductor L1a and the inductor L1b can be differential mode inductors, and the voltage control components DBs1a and DBs1b can be implemented by any one of a discharge tube, a varistor, or a transient suppression diode (TVS), respectively.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 620' can be interchanged, for example, the surge protection circuit 620' is connected in series on the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 , without affecting the circuit characteristics of the surge protection circuit 620'.
  • FIG. 53D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53B . The difference is that in this embodiment, the surge protection The circuit is configured at the first rectification output end 511 and the second rectification output end 512 of the rectification circuit 510 at the same time.
  • the inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance L1a and an inductance L1b.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' includes a voltage control component DBs1a, a voltage control component DBs1b, a current limiting component D1a, and a current limiting component D1b.
  • the first end of the inductor L1a is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511, the second end is coupled to the drive circuit 530, the first end of the inductor L1b is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512, and the second end is coupled to the drive circuit 530.
  • the voltage control component DBs1a and the current limiting component D1a are connected in series with the two ends of the inductor L1a in parallel, and the voltage control component DBs1b and the current limiting component D1b are connected in series with the two ends of the inductor L1b in parallel.
  • the working principle of the surge protection circuit in this embodiment is the same as that of 53B, but the surge protection circuit in this embodiment is respectively disposed at the first rectifier output end 511 and the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the surge protection circuit can respond to it and absorb the surge energy, thereby improving the reliability of the surge protection circuit.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 620' can be interchanged, for example, the surge protection circuit 620' is connected in series on the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 , without affecting the circuit characteristics of the surge protection circuit 620'.
  • FIG. 53E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application. It further includes a filter circuit 723'. Wherein, since the inductive circuit in the surge protection circuit also has the function of filtering in the power supply circuit, in some embodiments, in order to simplify the circuit structure, the filtering circuit 723 ′ is the inductive circuit.
  • FIG. 53F is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a surge protection circuit according to a sixth embodiment of the present application. It is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53A , except that the surge protection circuit 720 ′ in this embodiment includes The inductive circuit 721 ′ and the energy discharge circuit 722 ′ further include a filter circuit 723 ′. The structures and connection methods of the inductive circuit 721 ′ and the energy discharge circuit 722 ′ are the same as those in FIG. 53A , and are not repeated here.
  • the filter circuit 723' includes a capacitor C1 and a capacitor C2, one end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the inductive circuit 721', the other end is electrically connected to the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510, and one end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected. It is electrically connected to the other end of the inductive circuit 721 ′, and the other end is electrically connected to the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the inductance L1 in the inductive circuit 721 ′ also has a filtering function in the power supply loop
  • the inductance L1 can also be assigned to the filtering circuit 723 ′, which is the same as the filter circuit 723 ′.
  • the capacitor C1 and the capacitor C2 together form a ⁇ -type filter circuit to filter the received signal.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration, and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 720' can be interchanged without affecting the circuit characteristics of the surge circuit.
  • the surge protection circuit 720' is coupled to The first pin 501 and the second pin 502 .
  • FIG. 53G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the current limiting component D1 is further included.
  • the working mode of the surge protection circuit is the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 53B , only the filtering function is added on the basis thereof, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 53H is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the eighth embodiment of the present application, which is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53C, except that the surge protection circuit 720' in this embodiment is It includes an inductive circuit 721', an energy discharge circuit 722', and a filter circuit 723'.
  • the structures and connection methods of the inductive circuit 721' and the energy discharge circuit 722' are the same as those in FIG. 53C, and will not be repeated here.
  • the filter circuit 723' includes a capacitor C1 and a capacitor C2.
  • One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the inductor L1a, the other end is electrically connected to one end of the inductor L1b, and one end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to the other end of the inductor L1a. , and the other end is electrically connected to the other end of the inductor L1b.
  • the inductance L1a and the inductance L1b in the inductive circuit 721' also have filtering functions in the power supply loop
  • the inductance L1a and the inductance L1b can also be classified as the The filter circuit 723', together with the capacitor C1 and the capacitor C2, constitutes a filter circuit to filter the received signal.
  • the operation mode of the surge protection circuit is the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 53C , and only the filtering function is added on the basis thereof, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 53I is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a surge protection circuit according to a ninth embodiment of the present application. Similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53H, the difference is that in this embodiment, the energy discharge circuit 722' further includes a current limiting component D1a and a current limiting component D1b.
  • the current limiting component D1a is connected in series with the voltage control component DBs1a and connected in parallel to both ends of the inductor L1a
  • the current limiting component D1b is connected in series with the voltage control component DBs1b and connected in parallel with both ends of the inductor L1b.
  • the working manner of the surge protection circuit in this embodiment is similar to that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 53G , and details are not repeated here.
  • the power module 5 of the LED straight tube lamp 900 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit (eg 510 ), filter circuit (such as 520), and drive circuit (such as 530), an electric shock detection module 2000 is added, wherein the electric shock detection module 2000 includes a detection control circuit 2100 (or a detection controller) and a current limiting circuit 2200.
  • a rectifier circuit eg 510
  • filter circuit such as 520
  • drive circuit such as 530
  • an electric shock detection module 2000 is added, wherein the electric shock detection module 2000 includes a detection control circuit 2100 (or a detection controller) and a current limiting circuit 2200.
  • the power module 5 in this embodiment may include a rectifier circuit (eg, 510) in addition to the detection module 2000. ), a surge protection circuit (eg, 620 ′), and a driving circuit (eg, 530 ).
  • a rectifier circuit eg, 510
  • a surge protection circuit eg, 620 ′
  • a driving circuit eg, 530
  • other circuit units or parts included in the power module 5 are not limited.
  • the detection control circuit 2100 is a circuit configuration for performing the installation state detection/impedance detection of the LED straight tube lamp 900, so as to generate a corresponding control signal according to the detection result, wherein the detection result will indicate the LED straight tube light. Whether the lamp 900 is properly installed on the lamp socket, or it can be said to indicate whether there is abnormal external impedance access (eg, human body impedance).
  • abnormal external impedance access eg, human body impedance
  • the current limiting circuit 2200 is used to determine whether to limit the current to flow on the LED straight tube light 900 in response to the detection result indicated by the control signal, wherein the current limiting circuit 2200 receives an indication that the LED straight tube light 900 is correctly installed/no
  • the current limiting circuit 2200 enables the power supply module 5 to supply power to the LED module 50 normally (that is, the current of the power supply circuit that controls the LED straight tube lamp 900 flows normally), and the current limiting circuit 2200
  • the current limiting circuit 2200 When receiving a control signal indicating that the LED straight tube light 900 is improperly installed/connected with an abnormal external impedance, the current limiting circuit 2200 will limit the current limit of the LED straight tube light to less than an electric shock safety value, such as an electric shock safety value. It is 5MIU (rms) or 7.07MIU (peak).
  • the power loop refers to the path through which the power module 5 transmits current to the LED module 50 .
  • the installation state detection/impedance detection is, for example, the circuit operation in which the detection control circuit 2100 obtains the installation state information/equivalent impedance information of the LED straight tube lamp 900 by detecting the electrical characteristics (such as voltage, current) of the LED straight tube lamp 900 .
  • the detection control circuit 2100 may also perform electrical characteristic detection by controlling the current continuity of the power loop or establishing an additional detection path, thereby avoiding the risk of electric shock during detection. Specific circuit embodiments of the detection control circuit for electrical characteristic detection will be described below with reference to Figures 18 to 45F.
  • FIG. 17B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • the electric shock detection module 2000 of this embodiment is disposed outside the LED straight tube lamp 1000 and located on the power supply path of the external power grid 508 , for example, in the lamp socket.
  • the electric shock detection module 2000 will be connected in series to the power circuit of the LED straight tube light 1000 through the corresponding pins, so that the electric shock detection module 2000 can use The installation detection/impedance detection method described in the above embodiment of FIG.
  • the configuration of the electric shock detection module 2000 is the same as that in the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 17A , and details are not repeated here.
  • the architecture of the embodiments of Figures 17A and 17B can be integrated.
  • a plurality of electric shock detection modules 2000 may be installed in the LED straight tube light lighting system, wherein at least one electric shock detection module 2000 is disposed inside the LED straight tube light, and at least another installation detection module is disposed in the LED straight tube light Externally (for example, in the lamp socket), the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is electrically connected through the pins on the lamp head, so that the effect of electric shock protection can be further improved.
  • FIG. 17C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 1600 of the present embodiment is, for example, an external power supply type (Type-C) LED straight tube lamp, and the power supply module 5 is disposed in the LED straight tube.
  • the electric shock detection module 2000 is arranged inside the LED straight tube lamp 1600 and includes a detection control circuit 2100 and a current limiting circuit 2200 .
  • the current limiting circuit 2200 may be disposed on the power supply path and controlled by the detection control circuit 2100.
  • the specific operation mechanism of the electric shock detection module 2000 can be referred to as described in other corresponding embodiments, which will not be repeated here. Repeat. It is worth mentioning that, in the application of this embodiment, due to the function of the electric shock detection module 2000 , even if the external power module 5 is implemented with a non-isolated power conversion circuit, there is no risk of electric shock. Compared with the external power supply with the traditional LED straight tube lamp, the design options of the external power supply can be more diversified because it is no longer limited to the isolated power conversion circuit for matching design.
  • the electric shock detection module 2000 described herein is a circuit configuration applied in a power supply module of an LED straight tube lamp, which can be implemented by discrete circuits or integrated circuits, and the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • the name of the electric shock detection module 2000 is only to recognize its main function, but not to limit its scope.
  • any circuit configuration that can perform the circuit operations claimed in the present disclosure, or has the configuration and connection relationship of electronic components claimed in the present disclosure belongs to the scope claimed by the electric shock detection module 2000 of the present disclosure .
  • the electric shock detection module 2000 can also be named as a detection circuit, an installation detection module/circuit, an electric shock prevention module/circuit, an electric shock prevention detection module/circuit, an impedance detection module/circuit, or a direct expression It is a circuit configuration, and the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • FIGS. 17A and 17B the connection relationship between the LED straight tube lamp 900/1000 and the external power grid 508 is only schematically depicted, and it is not limited that the external driving signal is input to the LED straight tube lamp 900/1000 from a single end. 1000, together with the first description.
  • FIG. 17D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • the circuit configuration in this embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 17A , and the difference is that the LED straight tube lamp 900 in this embodiment further includes an impedance adjustment module 9100 .
  • the installation detection module 2000 will determine that the LED tube is installed abnormally, and the current limiting circuit 2200 will limit the current limit of the LED straight tube lamp to less than the electric shock safety value.
  • the electric shock safety value is, for example, 5MIU (effective value) or 7.07MIU (peak value), and the lamp cannot be lit normally.
  • the impedance adjustment module 9100 is electrically connected to the input end of the power supply module 5 and the power supply input end of the external power grid 508 to change the impedance characteristic of the power supply loop so that the LED straight tube lamp can still be lit normally when the line impedance Rh is large.
  • the impedance of the impedance adjustment module 9100 is set to be higher than the critical protection point.
  • the installation detection module 2000 determines that the lamp tube is abnormally installed and the lamp tube cannot be lit normally.
  • the power supply circuit is a circuit through which the external power grid 508 supplies power to the LED straight tube lamp 900 .
  • the two LED straight tube lamps are connected to the external power grid 508 in parallel, and the resistance Rh is the line impedance.
  • the impedance adjustment module 9100 in the LED straight tube lamp 900-1 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N
  • the impedance adjustment module 9100 in the LED straight tube lamp 900-2 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N.
  • the installation detection module 2000 determines that the lamp is installed normally , the LED straight tube light 900-1 lights up normally; similarly, the LED light 900-2 lights up normally.
  • the impedance adjustment module included in the LED straight tube lamp is also connected in parallel to the power supply circuit. After the influence of the impedance adjustment module, the installation detection module determines that the LED lamp is normal. installed without being affected by the line impedance Rh.
  • the installation detection module 2000 in the LED straight tube light 900-1 determines the impedance in the line, so that the LED light 900-1 is normally lit without being affected by the line impedance Rh.
  • the impedance of the impedance adjustment modules 9100 in the two LED straight tube lamps in parallel is less than the critical value Protection point, the LED straight tube light is normally lit.
  • the critically lit lamps can be set to n, that is, when the lamps connected to the power supply circuit are less than n, the impedance of the n LED straight tube lamps after the impedance adjustment modules 9100 are connected in parallel is greater than the critical protection point, The LED straight tube lamp cannot be lit normally; when the lamps connected to the power supply circuit are greater than or equal to n, the impedance of the impedance adjustment modules 9100 in n LED straight tube lamps connected in parallel is less than the critical protection point, and the LED straight tube lamp can be lit normally. Bright.
  • the impedance adjustment module 9100 includes a capacitor C9.
  • the capacitor C9 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N, that is, one pin of the capacitor C9 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminal L, and the other pin of the capacitor C9 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminal N.
  • Rh is the line impedance, and Rh is greater than the set threshold. This set threshold is the critical value for the installation detection module to determine whether the lamp is installed normally. When the impedance of the power supply circuit is greater than the set threshold, the installation detection module determines that the lamp is installed abnormally. When the resistance of the power supply circuit is less than the set threshold, the installation The detection module determines that the lamp is installed normally, and the LED straight lamp is normally lit.
  • the installation detection module 2000 determines whether there is an abnormal impedance access circuit/whether the lamp is installed normally by detecting the electrical signal in the circuit. In the electric shock detection stage, the capacitor C9 is discharged to the subsequent circuit, and the detection current in the power supply circuit detected by the installation detection module 2000 is larger than that of the circuit without the capacitor C9, but the electric shock detection current is still less than the set safety threshold. The module determines that the lamp is installed abnormally and the lamp cannot be lit normally.
  • the power supply input terminal is connected to capacitors C9 and C10 at the same time.
  • the specifications of capacitor C9 and capacitor C10 are set to be the same, and capacitor C9 After being connected in parallel with C10, it can be equivalent to C11, and the equivalent capacitor C11 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N.
  • the external drive signal After the system is powered on, the external drive signal first charges the equivalent capacitor C11, and the equivalent capacitor C11 discharges to the lamp at the same time. Since the capacitance value of the equivalent capacitor C11 is twice that of the capacitor C9, the installation detection module 2000 detects the electric shock during the electric shock detection stage.
  • the detection current in the incoming power supply circuit is larger than that when only one lamp is connected to the circuit. At this time, the electric shock detection current is greater than the set safety threshold.
  • the installation detection module determines that the lamp is installed normally, and the LED straight lamp 900-1 can be installed. Normally lit, the same LED straight tube light 900-2 can also be lit normally.
  • the capacitances incorporated into the power supply input terminals L and N will increase with the increase of the lamps. Increase, the capacitance value of its equivalent capacitance will also increase.
  • the number of lamps incorporated into the power supply loop is n (n ⁇ 2)
  • the capacitance value of the equivalent capacitor is nC9.
  • the impedance adjustment module shields" the installation detection module. It can be understood that the impedance adjustment module detects by changing the installation.
  • the installation detection current of the stage enables the installation detection module to judge that the lamp is normally installed and light the lamp normally.
  • n>2 the equivalent capacitance value nC9 connected to the power supply loop is greater than the critical capacitance value, and the impedance adjustment module "shields" the installation of the detection module to make the lamp light normally.
  • the capacitance value of the capacitor C9 in the impedance adjustment module can be changed to change the number of lamps that are critically lit. For example, it can be set that when the number of lamps connected to the power supply circuit is greater than or equal to 3, the LED lamps are normally lit, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the installation detection module 2000 determines that the lamp is normally installed and the LED straight lamp is normally lit. At this time, even if only one lamp is connected to the LED lighting system, it can still be lit normally.
  • the impedance adjustment module is installed in the LED straight tube lamp, it does not affect the safety performance of the lamp tube, that is, there is no risk of electric shock when the installer performs online installation.
  • FIG. 17G the LED straight tube lamps 900-1 and 900-2 have been connected to the power supply circuit and are normally lit.
  • the installer accidentally touches the mounting pins of the light tube, and the human body is connected to the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube light 900-3.
  • the external drive signal first passes through the line impedance Rh and The human body impedance Rm charges the capacitor in the impedance adjustment module, and the installation detection module 2000 in the LED straight tube lamp 900-3 performs electric shock detection. Since the capacitance value of the capacitor C12 is lower than the critical capacitance value, the power supply circuit detected by the installation detection module The detection current is less than the set safety threshold, the installation detection module determines that the LED straight tube light 900-3 is installed abnormally, the LED straight tube light 900-3 cannot be lit normally, and the current flowing through the human body is less than the critical safety current (5MIU), There is no risk of electric shock for installation and inspection personnel.
  • 5MIU critical safety current
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power supply module according to a tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube light 1100 directly receives, for example, an external driving signal provided by the external power grid 508 , wherein the external driving signal is supplied to the LED straight tube light 1100 through the live wire (L) and the neutral wire (N). on both ends of the pins 501 and 502.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 1100 may further include pins 503 and 504 .
  • the electric shock detection module 3000 is disposed in the lamp tube and includes a detection control circuit 3100 and a current limiting circuit 3200.
  • the electric shock detection module 3000 can also be referred to as an installation detection module 3000 (the installation detection module is described below for 3000).
  • the current limiting circuit 3200 is coupled to the rectifier circuit 510 via the first installation detection terminal TE1 , and is coupled to the filter circuit 520 via the second installation detection terminal TE2 , that is, connected in series to the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 .
  • the detection control circuit 3100 will detect the signal flowing through the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 in the detection mode (ie, the signal flowing through the power circuit), and determine whether to disable the external driving signal (ie, the signal flowing through the power circuit) according to the detection result. , the signal provided by the external power grid 508 ) flows through the LED straight tube light 1100 .
  • the detection control circuit 3100 When the LED straight tube lamp 1100 has not been properly installed in the lamp socket, the detection control circuit 3100 will detect a small current signal and determine that the signal flows through an excessively high impedance. At this time, the current limiting circuit 3200 will connect the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the The current path between the second mounting detection terminals TE2 is cut off to stop the operation of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 (ie, the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is not lit).
  • the detection control circuit 3100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed on the lamp socket, and the current limiting circuit 3200 will maintain the conduction between the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 operates normally (That is, the LED straight tube lamp 1100 can be normally lit).
  • the installation detection module 3000 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 Correctly installed on the lamp socket to make the current limiting circuit 3200 conduct, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 operates in a conducting state;
  • the installation detection module 3000 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is not correctly installed on the lamp socket, so that the current limiting circuit 3200 is turned off, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 enters a non-stop state.
  • the ON state or the RMS current on the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is limited to less than 5mA (5MIU based on the verification standard).
  • the installation detection module 3000 determines whether it is turned on or off based on the detected impedance, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is operated to be turned on or into a non-conduction/limited current state. In this way, the user can avoid the problem of electric shock due to mistakenly touching the conductive part of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 when the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is not properly installed on the lamp socket.
  • the installation detection module 3000 can determine whether the user touches the lamp by detecting the voltage/current change on the power circuit. , the above-mentioned anti-electric shock function can be realized. In other words, in the embodiment of the present application, the installation detection module 3000 can determine whether the lamp is installed correctly and whether the user touches the lamp by mistake by detecting electrical signals (including voltage or current) the conductive part. Furthermore, compared with the general LED power module, in some embodiments, the power module equipped with the installation detection module 3000 itself has the effect of preventing electric shock, so it is not necessary to design the rectifier circuit as in the general power circuit design.
  • the input terminal of 510 (ie, between the live wire and the neutral wire) is provided with a safety capacitor (ie, the X capacitor).
  • a safety capacitor ie, the X capacitor.
  • the equivalent capacitance value between the input terminals of the rectifier circuit 510 may be, for example, less than 47nF.
  • the power loop refers to the current path in the LED straight tube lamp 1100 , that is, from the pin receiving the first polarity/phase power (eg L line), through the power line and circuit components to the LED module , and then go through the LED module to the path formed by the pin that receives the second polarity/phase power supply (eg, N line).
  • the power circuit is formed between the pins 501 and 502 on the lamp caps on opposite sides of the lamp tube, not between the two pins 501 and 503 of the lamp cap on the same side ( or between 502 and 504).
  • the arrangement of the current limiting circuit 3200 between the rectifier circuit 510 and the filter circuit 520 is only an example of the present application.
  • the current limiting circuit 3200 only needs to be set at a position where the power loop can be controlled to be turned on and off to achieve the effect of preventing electric shock by installing the detection module 3000 .
  • the current limiting circuit 3200 may be disposed between the filter circuit 520 and the driving circuit 530, or between the driving circuit 530 and the LED module (50), but the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the electric shock detection method includes: turning the detection path on for a period of time and then turning it off (step S101 ); sampling the electrical signal on the detection path (Ste S102); determine whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics (step S103); when step S103 is determined to be yes, control the current limiting circuit 3200 to operate in the first configuration (step S104); and when step S103 determines If not, control the current limiting circuit 3200 to operate in the second configuration (step S105), and then return to step S101.
  • the detection path may be a power supply loop or an independent current path connected to the output side of the rectifier circuit 510 , and the specific configuration can refer to the description of the embodiments in FIGS. 19A to 26B below.
  • the setting of the period length, interval, and trigger time of the detection control circuit 3100 conducting the detection path can also refer to the description of the following embodiments.
  • conducting the detection path for a period of time may be implemented by a pulsed switch control means.
  • the sampled electrical signal may be a voltage signal, a current signal, a frequency signal, or a phase signal, or a signal that can represent the impedance change of the detection path.
  • the action of determining whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the predetermined signal characteristic may be, for example, comparing the relative relationship between the sampled electrical signal and a predetermined signal.
  • the detection controller 7100 determines that the electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics, which may correspond to the state of determining that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed/connected with no abnormal impedance, and the detection controller 7100 determines that the electrical signal does not conform to the preset signal characteristics. It is assumed that the signal characteristics may correspond to the state of determining that the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed/connected with abnormal impedance.
  • the first configuration and the second configuration are two different circuit configurations, and may depend on the configuration position and type of the current limiting circuit 3200 .
  • the first configuration may be a conduction configuration (no current limiting group). state)
  • the second configuration may be a cut-off configuration (current limiting configuration).
  • FIG. 19A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module 3000a includes a detection pulse generation module 3110, a detection result latch circuit 3120, a detection determination circuit 3130, and a current limiting circuit 3200a.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 , the detection result latch circuit 3120 and the detection determination circuit 3130 constitute the detection control circuit 3100 .
  • the detection and determination circuit 3130 (via the switch coupling terminal 3201 and the current limiting circuit 3200a) is coupled to the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 to detect the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 between the signals.
  • the detection determination circuit 3130 is also coupled to the detection result latch circuit 3120 via the detection result terminal 3131 , so as to transmit the detection result signal to the detection result latch circuit 3120 via the detection result terminal 3131 .
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 is coupled to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the pulse signal output terminal 3111 , and generates a pulse signal to notify the detection result latch circuit 3120 of the timing of latching the detection result.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 latches the detection result according to the detection result signal (or the detection result signal and the pulse signal), and is coupled to the current limiting circuit 3200a through the detection result latch terminal 3121 to transmit or reflect the detection result to the current limiting circuit 3200a .
  • the current limiting circuit 3200a determines to turn on or off the first mounting detection terminal TE1 and the second mounting detection terminal TE2 according to the detection result.
  • the current limiting circuit 3200a may also be a switch circuit 3200a (the switch circuit 3200a is described below).
  • the installation detection module 3000a further includes a ballast detection module 3150 .
  • the ballast detection module 3150 is used to determine whether the external driving signal is an AC signal provided by the ballast, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 can adjust the control method of the switch circuit 3200a according to the determination result, so as to ensure the performance of the ballast.
  • the LED straight tube lamp will emit a prompt (such as flashing) to remind the user of misuse, so as to avoid the AC signal output by the ballast from damaging the ballast Bypass type LED straight tube light.
  • the ballast detection module 3150 may also be referred to as a misuse warning module.
  • the above description is that the ballast detection module 3150 is used to detect whether the signal of the power circuit is the characteristic signal of the ballast, and outputs the first detection signal when it is detected that the signal of the power circuit is the characteristic signal of the ballast .
  • the ballast characteristic signal is used to describe the high frequency, high voltage and other characteristics of the AC signal output by the ballast (especially the electronic ballast).
  • the source of the external drive signal can be identified by detecting the electrical signal characteristics such as the frequency, amplitude or phase of the bus voltage.
  • the characteristic signal of the ballast represents the high frequency value (or interval) of the AC signal output by the ballast by the potential (or potential interval) of the voltage signal.
  • the characteristic signal of the ballast represents the valley phase of the AC signal output by the ballast by the potential (or potential interval) of the voltage signal.
  • the ballast detection module 3150 detects at least one of the frequency, phase, and amplitude of the signal in the power circuit through its terminal to determine whether the signal is a ballast characteristic signal.
  • the first detection signal (or referred to as the first indication signal) is used to indicate that the external driving signal is provided by the ballast.
  • the terminal of the ballast detection module 3150 is connected to the output or input of the rectifier circuit in the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the ballast detection module 3150 is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the path 3151, wherein the ballast detection module 315 detects the bus voltage in the power module, and according to the detected signal characteristics of the bus voltage To judge whether the external driving signal currently received by the LED straight tube lamp is the AC signal output by the ballast or the AC signal directly provided by the power grid
  • the ballast detection module 3150 may sample the signal on the rectified output 511/512 and determine the frequency of the sampled signal (ie, the frequency of the bus voltage).
  • the frequency of the signal detected by the ballast detection module 3150 is greater than a set value, it means that the currently input external driving signal is a high-frequency AC signal, that is, the external driving signal may be provided by the ballast, so
  • the ballast detection module 3150 sends a first indication signal (indicating that the external driving signal is provided by the ballast) to the detection result latch circuit 3120, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switching state of the switch circuit 3200a according to the first indication signal , to affect the current continuity on the power loop.
  • the ballast detection module 3150 when the frequency of the signal detected by the ballast detection module 3150 is less than or equal to the set value, it means that the currently input external driving signal is a low-frequency AC signal, that is, the external driving signal may be an AC signal. provided by the power grid, so the ballast detection module 3150 will send a second indication signal (indicating that the external drive signal is provided by the AC power grid) to the detection result latch circuit 3120, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switch circuit according to the second indication signal
  • the 3200a is maintained in an on state, so that the driving signal can be stably supplied to the rear LED modules, so that the LED modules can have consistent/uniform luminous brightness.
  • the above installation detection device further includes an installation prompt module.
  • the ballast detection module 3150 is electrically connected to an installation prompt module (not shown in the figure), and the installation prompt module is used to issue a misuse prompt of the LED straight tube lamp according to the first detection signal.
  • the installation prompt module adjusts the current continuity change on the power circuit according to the first detection signal, so that the rear LED module will A specific light pattern (light pattern) is generated in response to the continuous change of the current on the power circuit, which may prompt the user that there may be a wrong installation at present.
  • the continuous change of the current on the power loop is to adjust the intermittent-on-off change of the current in the power loop, so that the LED module at the back end will generate a specific light pattern of on-off.
  • the continuous change of the current on the power loop is to adjust the strong-to-weak change of the current in the power loop, so that the LED module at the back end can generate a specific light-dark light pattern.
  • the installation prompting module is also electrically connected to the detection and determination circuit 3130, and is used for controlling the disconnection of the power circuit according to the prompting logic of the pulse signal and the detection result signal.
  • the installation prompting module includes: a control circuit and the switch circuit 3200a in the example shown in FIG. 19A , the control circuit is connected with the detection pulse generation module 3110 , the detection determination circuit 3130 , and the ballast detection module 3150 and the switch circuit 3200a are electrically connected to control the switch circuit 3200a to be turned off when it is determined according to the pulse signal and the detection result signal that the LED straight tube lamp is not correctly installed in the lamp socket; or When the first detection signal is received, the switch circuit 3200a is controlled to be turned on or off to affect the current continuity on the power loop, so that the LED module at the rear end generates the above-mentioned specific lighting pattern.
  • control circuit in the installation prompting module is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 for receiving the periodic control signal generated by the detection result latch circuit 3120 based on the first indication signal,
  • the control circuit periodically controls the switching circuit 3200a to be turned on and off, so that the specific lighting pattern generated by the LED module is, for example, flickering at a constant frequency or an indefinite frequency.
  • the control circuit and the detection result latch circuit 3120 include shared circuit structures, such as logic circuits and the like.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 can periodically turn on and turn off the switch circuit 3200a when receiving the first indication signal, so that the magnitude of the driving current is affected by the switching of the switch circuit 3200a, thereby making the LED module The brightness of the light changes accordingly, forming a flickering light pattern.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 includes a circuit configuration shared with the control circuit.
  • the installation detection module 3000a further includes a prompt circuit 3160 .
  • the installation prompting module includes: prompting circuit 3160 .
  • the prompting circuit 3160 is controlled by the detection result latching circuit 3120 to issue misuse warnings such as sound and light when the LED straight tube lamp is misused, so as to remind the user of wrong installation. More specifically, the prompt circuit 3160 is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 via the path 3161 to receive the signal sent by the detection result latch circuit 3120 . When the detection result latch circuit 3120 receives the first indication signal, the detection result latch circuit 3160 sends a signal to enable the prompt circuit 3160, so that the prompt circuit 3160 issues a misuse warning.
  • the prompt circuit 3160 can be implemented with a buzzer, so that when the LED straight tube lamp is incorrectly installed in the lamp socket with a ballast, a buzzer sound is emitted to remind the user that the current misuse occurs situation. But it is not limited to this.
  • the prompt circuit 684 may further include a prompt light, so as to emit different colors or colors when the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed in the lamp socket with the ballast. Different intensities of light to remind users of the current installation status.
  • the prompt circuit 684 may include a buzzer and a prompt light at the same time, so that when the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed in a lamp socket with a ballast, the buzzer sound and prompt light can be used at the same time. Lights alert the user to a current misuse situation.
  • control switch circuit 3200a is turned off to maintain the power circuit in a cut-off state, so as to avoid the possible danger caused by the user not removing the LED straight tube light immediately.
  • the installation prompting module is also electrically connected to the detection and determination circuit 3130 for controlling the power circuit to be disconnected according to the prompting logic of the pulse signal and the detection result signal;
  • the first detection signal sends out a misuse prompt of the LED straight tube lamp; or the power loop is controlled to be disconnected according to the prompt logic of the pulse signal and the detection result signal, and the LED is sent out according to the first detection signal at the same time. Misuse tips for straight tube lamps.
  • the installation prompting module performs leakage detection and prompting, and ballast misuse detection and prompting according to a preset time sequence, and gives corresponding prompts according to the detection situation.
  • the timing sequence can be used to represent the timing sequence of leakage detection and ballast misuse detection, or the timing sequence of leakage current prompt and ballast misuse prompt.
  • the installation prompting module indicates leakage and misuse of the ballast through the configured switch circuit and control circuit, and the installation detection device performs the leakage detection and prompting and the misuse of the ballast in sequence.
  • the control circuit in the installation prompting module controls the switch circuit to perform the corresponding prompting operation according to the sequence of the received test result signal and the first test signal.
  • the installation prompting module indicates misuse of the ballast through the configured prompting circuit, and indicates leakage through the switch circuit and the control circuit, respectively, then the installation detection device can be arranged in sequence or at the same time. Perform leakage detection and prompting and ballast misuse detection and prompting. Correspondingly, the installation prompting module will give corresponding prompts in sequence or at the same time.
  • the multiplexing circuit structure may be omitted, shared, or based on timing.
  • the installation detection device includes an independent circuit structure for leakage detection and prompting functions, and an independent circuit structure for ballast detection and prompting functions.
  • the above-mentioned installation detection device can be omitted in which both the temporary storage of the detection result signal and the first detection can be omitted.
  • the installation detection module 3000a further includes an emergency control module 3140 .
  • the emergency control module 3140 is used to determine whether the external drive signal is a DC signal provided by the auxiliary power supply module, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 can adjust the control mode of the switch circuit 3200a according to the determination result, so as to directly control the LED.
  • the malfunction of the installation detection module due to the input of the auxiliary power supply can be avoided. The parts of this embodiment that are the same as those of the previous embodiment will not be repeated here.
  • the emergency control module 3140 is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the path 3141, wherein the emergency control module 3140 detects the bus voltage in the power module, and determines whether the external driving signal currently received by the LED straight tube lamp is is a DC signal. If the emergency control module 3140 determines that the external driving signal is a DC signal, the emergency control module 3140 will output the first state signal indicating the emergency state to the detection result latch circuit 3120; otherwise, if the emergency control module 3140 determines that the external driving signal is a non-DC signal signal, the emergency control module 3140 will output a second state signal indicating the non-emergency state to the detection result latch circuit 3120 .
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 When the detection result latch circuit 3120 receives the first state signal, no matter what the outputs of the detection pulse generation module 3110 and the detection determination circuit 3130 are, the detection result latch circuit 3120 will keep the current limiting circuit 3200a in a conducting state ( This state can be considered emergency mode).
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 When the detection result latch circuit 3120 receives the second state signal, the detection result latch circuit 3120 operates according to the original mechanism, ie, controls the current limiting circuit 3200a to be turned on or off based on the pulse signal and the detection result signal.
  • the bus voltage described herein may be the input voltage/signal before the bridge (ie, the external driving signal) or the rectified voltage/signal after the bridge, which is not limited in the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 48B is attached below to further illustrate the specific working mechanism of the installation detection module with the emergency control module 3140 .
  • FIG. 48B is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. Please refer to FIG. 19A and FIG. 48B at the same time, when the power module of the LED straight tube light receives the external driving signal, the emergency control module 3140 will first detect the bus voltage (step S201 ), and determine whether the bus voltage is continuously high during the first period at the first level (step S202 ), wherein the first period may be, for example, 75ms, and the first level may be any level between 100V-140V, such as 110V or 120V. In other words, in an embodiment of step S202, the emergency control module 3140 determines whether the bus voltage is continuously higher than 110V or 120V for more than 75ms.
  • step S202 If the emergency control module 3140 determines yes in step S202, it means that the currently received external driving signal is a DC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the emergency mode, and makes the detection result latch circuit 3120 control the switch circuit 3200a to operate in the first configuration (step S203), wherein the first configuration may be, for example, a conduction configuration. On the contrary, if the emergency control module 3140 determines NO in step S202, it means that the currently received external driving signal is an AC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the detection mode, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 determines the installation state of the LED straight tube lamp by outputting a pulse signal to the switch circuit 3200a. For the specific operation of the installation detection module 3000a in the detection mode, reference may be made to the description of the relevant embodiments.
  • the emergency control module 3140 in addition to maintaining the switch circuit 3200a in the first configuration, the emergency control module 3140 further determines whether the bus voltage rises above the second level (step S204). If the emergency control module 3140 determines that the bus voltage does not rise to a level greater than the second level, it means that it is still in the emergency mode, so the switch circuit 3200a will continue to maintain the first configuration. If the emergency control module 3140 determines that the bus voltage rises from the first level to greater than the second level, it means that the external drive signal currently received by the power module has been switched from a DC signal to an AC signal, that is, the external power grid has resumed power supply. The emergency control module 3140 will cause the installation detection module 3000a to enter the detection mode.
  • the second level may be any level greater than the first level but less than 277V, for example, when the first level is 110V, the second level is 120V.
  • the emergency control module 3140 determines whether the bus voltage has a rising edge greater than 120V, and when the determination is yes, it enters the detection mode.
  • a detection device is installed to obtain the signal of the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp, and the LED is emitted when it is detected that the signal is the characteristic signal of the ballast. Indicates the misuse of the straight tube light, and/or disconnects the power circuit when human contact with the signal is detected.
  • the installation detection device can be used for ballast detection or leakage detection alone, or can be used for both ballast detection and leakage detection.
  • the installation detection device is used to perform both ballast detection and leakage detection.
  • the circuit structure and detection method of the ballast detection are as described in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the circuit structure and detection of the leakage detection are as follows: The method is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and any leakage detection method capable of detecting whether the signal is in contact with a human body (ie, whether there is leakage) falls within the scope of this application.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 , the detection determination circuit 3130 , the detection result latch circuit 3120 and the switch circuit 3200 a in the installation detection module 3000 a can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 19B to 19E respectively (but not only limited to this), wherein FIG. 19B to FIG. 19E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
  • FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generation module installed with a detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 includes capacitors C11 (or the first capacitor), C12 (or the second capacitor) and C13 (or the third capacitor), resistors R11 (or the first resistor), R12 (or the third capacitor) Two resistors) and R13 (or third resistor), buffer (buffer) BF1 (or first buffer) and BF2 (or second buffer), inverter INV, diode D11 (or called first buffer) is the first diode) and the OR gate (OR gate) OG1 (or the first OR gate).
  • the capacitor C11 and the resistor R11 are connected in series between a driving voltage (for example, called, and often set as a high level) and a reference potential (here, the ground potential is used as an example), which The connection point is coupled to the input end of the buffer BF1.
  • the resistor R12 is coupled to a driving voltage (which may be referred to as VCC) and the input terminal of the inverter INV.
  • the resistor R13 is coupled between the input end of the buffer BF2 and a reference potential (here, the ground potential is used as an example).
  • the positive terminal of the diode is grounded, and the negative terminal is also coupled to the input terminal of the buffer BF2.
  • One end of the capacitor C12 and one end of the capacitor C13 are commonly coupled to the output end of the buffer BF1, the other end of the capacitor C12 is connected to the input end of the inverter INV, and the other end of the capacitor C13 is coupled to the input end of the buffer BF2.
  • the output terminal of the inverter INV and the output terminal of the buffer BF2 are coupled to the input terminal of the OR gate OG1.
  • FIG. 45A is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the input end of the buffer BF1 is coupled to the connection point between the capacitor C11 and the resistor R11, so it outputs a high level signal at the beginning, and when the level of the connection point between the capacitor C11 and the resistor R11 drops to the low logic judgment level, it turns into low level signal. That is, the buffer BF1 generates an input pulse signal, and then keeps the low level (stops outputting the input pulse signal).
  • the pulse width of the input pulse signal is equal to a (initially set) time period, and the time period is determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C11 and the resistance of the resistor R11.
  • the connection end of the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 is also at a high level.
  • one end of the resistor R13 is grounded, and one end of the capacitor C13 receives the pulse signal of the buffer BF1. Therefore, the connection terminal of the capacitor C13 and the resistor R13 is at a high level at the beginning, and then gradually drops to zero with time (at the same time, the capacitor stores a voltage equal to or close to the driving voltage VCC).
  • the inverter INV outputs a low-level signal
  • the buffer BF2 outputs a high-level signal
  • the OR gate OG1 outputs a high-level signal (the first pulse signal DP1 ) at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 .
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 latches the detection result for the first time according to the detection result signal and the pulse signal.
  • the buffer BF2 turns to output a low level signal, so that the OR gate OG1 outputs a low level signal at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 (stop outputting the first pulse signal DP1).
  • the pulse width of the pulse signal output by the OR gate OG1 is determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C13 and the resistance of the resistor R13.
  • the buffer BF2 still keeps outputting the low-level signal.
  • the level of one end of the capacitor C12 is instantly reduced to zero by the driving voltage VCC, so that the connection terminal of the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 is at a low level .
  • the output signal of the inverter INV changes to a high level, so that the OR gate outputs a high level (the second pulse signal DP2).
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 latches the detection result for the second time according to the detection result signal and the pulse signal.
  • the resistor R12 charges the capacitor C12, so that the level of the connection terminal between the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 gradually increases with time to be equal to the driving voltage VCC.
  • the inverter INV When the level of the connection terminal of the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 rises to the high logic level, the inverter INV outputs the low level again, and the OR gate OG1 stops outputting the second pulse signal DP2.
  • the pulse width of the second pulse signal is determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C12 and the resistance of the resistor R12.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates two high-level pulse signals in the detection mode - the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2, which are output from the pulse signal output terminal 3111, and the first pulse signal and the second pulse signal DP2.
  • the set time interval TIV is mainly determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C11 and the resistance of the resistor R11. resistance value to decide.
  • the adjustment of the set time interval TIV may be implemented by setting the frequency/period or other adjustable parameters of the digital circuit.
  • FIG. 19C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3130 includes a comparator CP11 (or a first comparator) and a resistor R14 (or a fourth resistor).
  • the inverting terminal of the comparator CP11 receives the reference level signal Vref, and the non-inverting terminal is grounded through the resistor R14 and coupled to the switch coupling terminal 3201 at the same time.
  • FIG. 19C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3130 includes a comparator CP11 (or a first comparator) and a resistor R14 (or a fourth resistor).
  • the inverting terminal of the comparator CP11 receives the reference level signal Vref, and the non-inverting terminal is grounded through the resistor R14 and coupled to the switch coupling terminal 3
  • the signal flowing into the current limiting circuit 3200 a from the first installation detection terminal TE1 will be output through the switch coupling terminal 3201 and flow through the resistor R14 .
  • the comparator CP11 When the current flowing through the resistor R14 is too large (that is, higher than or equal to the installation setting current, for example, the current value is 2A) and the level on the resistor R14 is higher than the level of the reference level signal Vref (corresponding to The two lamp caps are correctly inserted into the lamp socket), the comparator CP11 generates a high-level detection result signal and outputs it from the detection result terminal 3131 .
  • the comparator CP11 when the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, the comparator CP11 will output a high-level detection result signal Sdr at the detection result terminal 3131 .
  • the comparator CP11 When the current flowing through the resistor R14 is insufficient to make the level on the resistor R14 higher than the level of the reference level signal Vref (which may correspond to only one of the lamp caps being correctly inserted into the lamp socket), the comparator CP11 generates a low level The bit detection result signal Sdr is output from the detection result terminal 3131 .
  • the comparator CP11 will output a low-level detection result at the detection result terminal 3131 Signal Sdr.
  • FIG. 19D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection result latch circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 includes a D Flip-flop DFF (or a first D-type flip-flop), a resistor R15 (or a fifth resistor) and an OR gate OG2 (or a second OR gate) ).
  • the clock input terminal (CLK) of the D-type flip-flop DFF is coupled to the detection result terminal 3131, and the input terminal D is coupled to the driving voltage VCC.
  • the detection result terminal 3131 outputs a low-level detection result signal Sdr
  • the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a low-level signal at the output terminal Q; when the detection result terminal 3131 outputs a high-level detection result signal, the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a high-level detection result signal.
  • the DFF outputs a high-level signal at the output terminal Q.
  • the resistor R15 is coupled between the output terminal Q of the D-type flip-flop DFF and a reference potential (eg, ground potential).
  • a reference potential eg, ground potential.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 Since the detection pulse generation module 3110 only outputs the first pulse signal DP1 or the second pulse signal DP2 in the detection mode DTM, the dominant OR gate OG2 outputs a high-level detection result latch signal, and the rest of the time (including the work after the detection mode DTM) Mode DRM) is dominated by D-type flip-flop DFF.
  • the detection result latch signal is high level or low level. Therefore, when the high-level detection result signal Sdr does not appear at the detection result terminal 3131, the D-type flip-flop DFF maintains a low-level signal at the output terminal Q, so that the detection result latch terminal 3121 also maintains a low level in the working mode DRM The level detection result latch signal.
  • the detection result latch terminal 3121 also maintains a high-level detection result latch signal when it enters the working mode DRM.
  • FIG. 19E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the switch circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the switch circuit 3200a may include a transistor, such as a bipolar junction transistor M11 (or a first transistor) as a power transistor. Power transistors can handle high currents and powers and are especially used in switching circuits.
  • the collector of the bipolar junction transistor M11 is coupled to the first mounting detection terminal TE1 , the base is coupled to the detection result latch terminal 3121 , and the emitter switch is coupled to the terminal 3201 .
  • the bipolar junction transistor M11 When the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates the first pulse signal DP1 or the second pulse signal DP2, the bipolar junction transistor M11 will be turned on for a short period of time, so that the detection determination circuit 3130 performs detection to determine the detection result latch signal is high level bit or low level.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 When the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a high-level detection result latch signal at the detection result latch terminal 3121, it indicates that the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket, so the dual junction transistor M11 will conduct Therefore, conduction between the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 is made (ie, the power circuit is turned on).
  • the driving circuit (not shown) in the power module is activated and starts to operate based on the voltage on the power circuit, and then generates the lighting control signal Slc to switch the power switch (not shown), so that the driving current can be generated And light up the LED module.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a low-level detection result latch signal at the detection result latch terminal 3121, the bipolar junction transistor M11 will be turned off, causing the first mounting detection terminal TE1 and the second mounting terminal TE1 to be turned off. The detection terminal TE2 is cut off.
  • the driving circuit in the power module will not be activated, so the lighting control signal Slc will not be generated.
  • FIG. 19F is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch circuit according to another embodiment.
  • the transistors in the switch circuit 3200 a of the present embodiment are shown as a metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor (MOSFET) M12 as an example, and the switch circuit 3200 a further includes a pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 .
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 is electrically connected to the control terminal of the transistor M12 and the detection result latch terminal 3121 of the detection result latch circuit 3120, and is used to assist the control terminal of the transistor M12 in the detection mode.
  • the signal S M12 on the signal S M12 is reset, so that the falling edge of the signal S M12 matches the signal of the detection result latch terminal 3121 in the detection mode (corresponding to the pulse signal on the pulse signal output terminal 3111 ).
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 can increase the discharge rate of the signal S M12 in the detection stage, so that the signal S M12 can be pulled down to the low level faster when the pulse signal returns to the low level, thereby reducing the pulse signal and control phase difference between the signals, and avoid malfunction of the transistor M12.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a pulse signal through the detection result latch terminal 3121 to control the transistor M12 to be intermittently turned on periodically.
  • the signal S M12 will also be a pulse signal, and will be the same as the detection result latch on the terminal 3121.
  • the signals are synchronized (ie, the rising and falling edges of the signal occur at approximately the same time).
  • the charging and discharging speed of the signal S M12 will be greatly affected by the circuit design and the selection of circuit parameters of the transistor M12 .
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 of this embodiment is enabled when the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a low level signal and the signal S M12 remains at a high level, thereby conducting an additional discharge path to speed up the discharge speed. This further solves the above-mentioned problem of signal asynchrony.
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 can be implemented by using the circuit structure shown in FIG. 19F , wherein the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 includes, for example, a transistor M13 (shown as a PNP transistor as an example, but not in this way). limited), and resistors R16 and R17.
  • the control terminal of the transistor M13 is electrically connected to the detection result latch terminal 3121 via the resistor R16
  • the first terminal of the transistor M13 is electrically connected to the control terminal of the transistor M12
  • the second terminal of the transistor M13 is electrically connected to the ground terminal GND via the resistor R17.
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 may further include a diode D12 and resistors R18 and R19.
  • the anode of the diode D12 is electrically connected to the detection result latch terminal 3121 .
  • One end of the resistor R18 is electrically connected to the cathode of the diode D12, and the other end of the resistor R18 is electrically connected to the control end of the transistor M12 and the first end of the transistor M13.
  • the resistor R19 is electrically connected between the control terminal of the transistor M12 and the ground terminal GND.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 When the LED straight tube lamp works in the working mode, the detection result latch circuit 3120 will output a high level signal through the detection result latch terminal 3121, so that the signal S M12 on the control terminal of the transistor M12 is also at a high level, and then The transistor M12 is turned on. At this time, the transistor M13 in the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 will remain in an off state in response to the high level signal of the detection result latch terminal 3121 , so the level of the signal S M12 will not be affected by the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 . influences.
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 in this state can be regarded as being in a disabled state.
  • the transistor M13 When the LED straight tube lamp works in the detection mode, if the signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121 is roughly synchronized with the signal SM12/there is no phase difference, no matter it is during the high level or the low level of the signal SM12, the transistor M13 The first terminal of M13 and the control terminal are always in a reverse bias state, so that the transistor M13 is kept off.
  • the signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121 and the signal S M12 are not synchronized/there is a phase difference, especially when the phase of the signal SM12 lags behind the signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121, the signal S M12 is at a high level at this time and The signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121 is at a low level, so that the first terminal and the control terminal of the transistor M13 are in a forward bias state.
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 in this state can be regarded as being in an enabled state.
  • the transistor M13 is turned on, and the signal S M12 can be discharged through the discharge path from the transistor M13 and the resistor R17 to the ground terminal GND, so that the falling speed of the signal S M12 from high level to low level is further increased.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 since the external driving signal Sed is an AC signal, in order to avoid the detection error caused by the level of the external driving signal being just near the zero point when the detection determination circuit 3130 detects. Therefore, the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2 so that the detection determination circuit 3130 detects twice, so as to avoid the problem that the level of the external driving signal is just near the zero point during single detection.
  • the generation time difference of the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2 is not an integer multiple of half of the period T of the external driving signal Sed, that is, not an integer corresponding to the 180-degree phase difference of the external driving signal Sed. multiple. In this way, when one of the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2 is generated, if the external driving signal Sed is unfortunately near the zero point, it can be avoided that the external driving signal Sed is also near the zero point when the other is generated.
  • the generation time difference between the first pulse signal and the second pulse signal that is, the set time interval TIV can be expressed by the formula as follows:
  • TIV (X+Y)(T/2);
  • T is the period of the external drive signal
  • X is an integer greater than or equal to zero, 0 ⁇ Y ⁇ 1.
  • the preferred range of Y is between 0.05-0.95, more preferably between 0.15-0.85.
  • the structure of generating two pulse signals for installation detection is only an example of the implementation of the detection pulse generation module.
  • the detection pulse generation module may be configured to generate one or more than two pulse signals for installation detection, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the circuit logic judgment error of the installation detection module will start to rise.
  • the generation of the first pulse signal DP1 can be set to be generated when the driving voltage VCC reaches or is higher than a predetermined level, so that the detection and determination circuit 3130 can only perform the detection and determination circuit 3130 after the driving voltage VCC reaches a sufficient level, so as to avoid the problem of insufficient level.
  • the circuit logic judgment of the installation detection module is wrong.
  • the detection and determination circuit when one end of the LED straight tube lamp is inserted into the lamp socket and the other end of the lamp is floating or in electrical contact with the human body, the detection and determination circuit outputs a low-level detection result signal Sdr due to the large impedance.
  • the detection result latch circuit latches the low-level detection result signal Sdr into a low-level detection result latch signal according to the pulse signals DP1/DP2 of the detection pulse generating module, and also maintains the detection result in the working mode DRM. In this way, the switch circuit can be kept off to avoid continuous energization. In this way, the possibility of electric shock to the human body can also be avoided, so that the requirements of safety regulations can be met.
  • the detection and determination circuit When the lamp caps at both ends of the LED straight tube lamp are correctly inserted into the lamp socket (time point td), the detection and determination circuit outputs a high-level detection result signal Sdr because the impedance of the LED straight tube lamp itself is small.
  • the detection result latch circuit latches the high-level detection result signal Sdr into a high-level detection result latch signal according to the pulse signals DP1/DP2 of the detection pulse generating module, and also maintains the detection result in the working mode DRM. In this way, the switch circuit can be kept on and continuously energized, so that the LED straight tube lamp operates normally in the working mode DRM.
  • the input of the detection and determination circuit is low.
  • the detection result signal Sdr of the level is sent to the detection result latch circuit, and then the detection pulse generating module outputs a low level signal to the detection result latch circuit, so that the detection result latch circuit outputs a low level
  • a detection result of the level latches the signal to turn off the switch circuit, wherein the turn-off of the switch circuit cuts off the connection between the first installation detection terminal and the second installation detection terminal, that is, the LED straight tube lamp into a non-conducting state.
  • the detection and determination circuit inputs the detection result signal of a high level to the detection result latch circuit , making the detection result latch circuit output a high-level detection result latch signal to turn on the switch circuit, wherein the conduction of the switch circuit enables the first installation detection terminal and the second installation detection terminal Conduction between the terminals means that the LED straight tube lamp operates in a conducting state.
  • the installation detection module will first perform pulse generation action to detect the installation status of the LED straight tube light, and after confirming that the LED straight tube light has been installed correctly, the power circuit will be turned on to give enough driving current to light the LED module. Therefore, At least until the first pulse is generated, the LED straight tube lamp will not be lit (ie, the power loop will not be turned on, or the current on the power loop will be limited to less than 5mA/MIU).
  • the time required for the first pulse to be generated after the LED straight tube light is installed and powered on is approximately greater than or equal to 100 milliseconds (ms). In other words, the LED straight tube lamp of this embodiment will not be lit for at least 100ms after being installed and powered on.
  • the installation detection module will continue to send out pulses to detect the installation state before the LED straight tube light is correctly installed, if the LED straight tube light is not lit after a pulse is generated (that is, it is not If it is determined to be installed correctly), the LED straight tube light will be lit at least after the aforementioned set time interval TIV (that is, after the next pulse is generated).
  • the LED straight tube lamp of the present embodiment is not lit 100ms after installation and electrification, it will not be lit during the period of 100ms+TIV.
  • the "LED straight tube light is powered on” mentioned here means that an external power supply (such as commercial power) is applied to the straight tube light, and the power loop of the LED straight tube light is electrically connected to the ground level ( ground level), which in turn creates a voltage difference across the power loop.
  • the energization of the correct installation of the LED straight tube light means that the external power supply is applied to the LED straight tube light, and the LED straight tube light is electrically connected to the ground level through the grounding circuit of the lamp; and the LED straight tube light is incorrect.
  • Installation means that the external power is applied to the LED straight tube light, but the LED straight tube light is not only electrically connected to the ground level through the grounding line of the lamp, but is connected to the ground level through the human body or other impedance objects. That is, in the incorrect installation state, there will be unexpected impedance objects in series on the current path.
  • the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 generated by the detection pulse generation module is between 1us and 1ms, and its function is only when the LED straight tube lamp is energized.
  • This pulse signal is used to make the switch circuit conduct for a short time. .
  • a pulse current can be generated, which flows through the detection and judgment circuit for detection and judgment.
  • the long-term conduction is not caused by the short-time pulse, and there is no danger of electric shock.
  • the detection result latch circuit also maintains the detection result in the operating mode DRM, and no longer changes the previously latched detection result due to the change of the circuit state, thereby avoiding the problem caused by the change of the detection result.
  • the installation detection module (ie the switch circuit, the detection pulse generation module, the detection result latch circuit and the detection determination circuit) can be integrated into the chip, which can be embedded in the circuit, which can save the circuit cost and volume of the installation detection module.
  • the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be further between 10us and 1ms; in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be further between 15us and 30us in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be further between 200us and 400us; in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be 20us, 35us or within plus or minus 15% of 45us; in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be within plus or minus 15% of 300us.
  • the pulse/pulse signal refers to a severe voltage or current signal change that occurs briefly in the continuous signal time process, that is, the signal suddenly changes in a short period of time, and then quickly returns to its original state. initial value. Therefore, the pulse signal may be a voltage or current signal that changes from a low level to a high level for a period of time and then returns to a low level, or a voltage or current signal that changes from a high level to a low level.
  • the application is not limited to this.
  • the period corresponding to the "short-term signal change" mentioned herein refers to a period that is not enough to change the operating state of the overall LED straight tube light and does not cause electric shock hazards to the human body.
  • the turn-on period of the switch circuits 3200/3200a will be short enough so that the LED modules will not be lit, and the effective current in the power loop will not be turned on. will be greater than the current limit setting value (5MIU).
  • the "severe signal change" as used herein means that the signal change is sufficient to cause the electronic component receiving the pulse signal to change its operating state in response to the pulse signal.
  • the switch circuits 3200/3200a receive the pulse signals DP1/DP2
  • the current limiting circuits 3200/3200a will be turned on or off in response to the level switching of the pulse signals DP1/DP2.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 is described by generating two pulse signals DP1 and DP2 as an example, the detection pulse generation module 3110 of the present application is not limited to this.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 may be a circuit for generating a single pulse or a circuit for generating multiple pulses independently.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates a single pulse
  • a simple circuit configuration of an RC circuit and an active component/active component can be used to realize a single pulse output.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110a may only include a capacitor C11, a resistor R11 and a buffer BF1. Under this configuration, the detection pulse generating module 3110a only generates a single pulse signal DP1.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110a may further include a reset circuit (not shown), and the reset circuit may generate the first pulse signal and/or the second pulse signal Afterwards, the working state of the circuit is reset, so that the detection pulse generating module 3110a can generate the first pulse signal and/or the second pulse signal again after a period of time. That is, through the function of the reset circuit, the detection pulse generating module 3110a can generate a plurality of pulse signals according to a fixed or random set time interval TIV.
  • the generating a plurality of pulse signals according to a fixed set time interval TIV may also be, for example, generating a pulse signal at a fixed interval of 20 milliseconds to 2 seconds (ie, 20ms ⁇ TIV ⁇ 2s).
  • the setting The time interval TIV may be between 500ms and 2s; in some embodiments, the set time interval TIV may be within plus or minus 15% of 75ms; in some embodiments, the set time interval TIV may be 45ms Within plus or minus 15% of ; in some embodiments, the set time interval TIV may be within plus or minus 15% of 30 ms.
  • the generation of the plurality of pulse signals according to the random set time interval TIV may be, for example, that the set time interval TIV between each adjacent pulse signal is selected from a random set value in the interval of 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds. .
  • the timing and frequency at which the detection pulse generating module 3110 sends out a pulse signal for installation detection can be set accordingly considering the influence of the detection current on the human body in the detection mode.
  • the harm of the current size and the duration to the human body is roughly negatively correlated, that is, on the premise that the passing current does not endanger the safety of the human body, the greater the passing current, the shorter the duration of the power-on; on the contrary, if the passing current is small, Then it can be powered on for a long time without causing harm to human body.
  • whether the human body is actually subject to electric shock depends on the amount of current (or electric power) applied to the human body per unit time, rather than the amount of current flowing through the human body.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 can be configured to only send a pulse signal within a certain time interval for installation detection, and stop sending the pulse signal after the time interval exceeds the time interval to avoid the detection current causing human harm.
  • FIG. 45D is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the detection current according to the first embodiment of the present application, wherein the horizontal axis of the graph is time (marked as t), and the vertical axis is the current value (marked as I).
  • the detection pulse module 3110 will send out a pulse signal within the detection time interval (the pulse width and the set time interval of the pulse signal can refer to other related embodiments), so that the detection path/power circuit is turned on.
  • the detection current Iin (which can be obtained by measuring the input current of the power module) will generate a corresponding current pulse Idp in response to the timing of the pulse of the pulse signal, wherein the detection and determination circuit 3130 is By detecting the current value of these current pulses Idp, it can be judged whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 stops sending pulse signals, so that the detection path/power circuit is cut off. From a larger time dimension, the detection pulse generation module 3110 will generate a pulse group DPg within the detection time interval Tw, and determine whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed in the lamp socket through the detection of the pulse group DPg superior.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 only sends a pulse signal within the detection time interval Tw, wherein the detection time interval Tw can be set to be between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds inclusive. Any numerical point with two decimal places, such as 0.51, 0.52, 0.53, ..., 0.6, 0.61, 0.62, ... 1.97, 1.98, 1.99, 2, but the present application is not limited to this. It is worth mentioning that, by properly selecting the detection time interval Tw, the detection action of the entire pulse group DPg will not generate electric power enough to harm the human body, thereby achieving the effect of preventing electric shock.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 can be implemented by using a pulse generating circuit (as shown in FIGS. 19B and 20B ) and a timing circuit (not shown), and the timing circuit can output the output after counting a certain period of time. Signals the pulse generation circuit to stop generating pulses.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 can be implemented by using a pulse generating circuit (as shown in FIGS.
  • the signal shielding circuit can be implemented with a simple circuit (eg, an RC circuit) without changing the design of the original pulse generating circuit.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 may be configured to send the next pulse signal every time a pulse signal is sent out at least a set time interval greater than or equal to a certain safety value, so as to avoid the detection current from causing human harm.
  • FIG. 45E is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the detection current according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 will send a pulse signal at a set time interval TIV greater than a certain safety value (for example, 1 second) (for the pulse width setting of the pulse signal, please refer to other related embodiments), so that the detection path / The power circuit is turned on.
  • the detection current Iin (which can be obtained by measuring the input current of the power module) will generate a corresponding current pulse Idp in response to the timing of the pulse of the pulse signal, wherein the detection and determination circuit 3130 is By detecting the current value of these current pulses Idp, it can be judged whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 may be configured to send out a pulse group at a set time interval that is greater than or equal to a specific safety value for installation detection, so as to prevent the detection current from causing human harm.
  • FIG. 45F is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the detection current according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 will first send out a plurality of pulse signals in the first detection time interval Tw (the pulse width and the set time interval of the pulse signals can refer to other related embodiments), so that the detection path/power circuit is turned on.
  • the detection current Iin will generate a plurality of corresponding current pulses Idp in response to the pulse generation point of the pulse signal, and the current pulses Idp in the first detection time interval Tw constitute the first pulse group DPg1.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 will suspend the output of the pulse signal for a set time interval TIVs (for example, greater than or equal to 1 second), and will not issue a pulse again after entering the next detection time interval Tw Signal. Similar to the operation in the first detection time interval Tw, the detection current Iin in the second detection time interval Tw and the third detection time interval Tw will constitute the second pulse group DPg2 and the third pulse group DPg3, respectively.
  • the circuit 3130 determines whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket by detecting the current values of the pulse groups DPg1 , DPg2 and DPg3 .
  • the magnitude of the current of the current pulse Idp is related to the impedance on the detection path/power loop. Therefore, when designing the detection pulse generating module 3110, the format of the output pulse signal can be correspondingly designed according to the selection and setting of the detection path/power circuit.
  • FIG. 19G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the first embodiment of the application.
  • the emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 to detect the voltage signal HV1 of the rectifier output terminal.
  • the voltage signal HV1 can be used to determine the external current received by the LED straight tube lamp. Whether the drive signal is a DC signal.
  • the anode of the diode D51 is electrically connected to the first rectifier output terminal 511, and the cathode thereof is electrically connected to the input terminal of the filter circuit (ie, the connection terminal of the capacitor 725 and the inductor 726).
  • the emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through a path 3141 .
  • the addition of the diode D51 can limit the current direction on the main power circuit, so that the voltage signal HV1 detected by the emergency control module 3140 is a rectified signal, and is not affected by the capacitance in the filter circuit.
  • the diode D51 can also be omitted.
  • the first rectification output terminal 511 is the rectified output positive terminal
  • the second rectified output terminal is the rectified output negative terminal.
  • FIG. 19H is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment described in FIG. 19G , but the difference is that the emergency control module 3140 detects the voltage signal before the rectifier circuit 510 . By detecting the voltage signal HV2 , it can also be determined that the LED straight tube lamp is currently receiving Whether the received external drive signal is a DC signal.
  • the anode of the diode D91 is electrically connected to the first pin 501
  • the anode of the diode D92 is electrically connected to the second pin 502
  • the cathode of the diode D91 and the cathode of the diode D92 are electrically connected to the emergency control module 3140 .
  • the emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the second rectification output terminal 512 , and is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the passage 3141 .
  • the first rectification output terminal 511 is the rectified output positive terminal
  • the second rectified output terminal is the rectified output negative terminal.
  • FIG. 19I is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is similar to the embodiment described in FIG. 19H , and the difference is that in this embodiment, the emergency control circuit 3140 only detects the voltage signal before the rectifier bridge 510 through the diode D92 .
  • the anode of the diode D92 is electrically connected to the second pin 502 , and the cathode thereof is electrically connected to the emergency control module 3140 .
  • the emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the second rectification output terminal 512 , and is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the passage 3141 .
  • the first rectification output terminal 511 is the rectified output positive terminal
  • the second rectified output terminal is the rectified output negative terminal.
  • FIG. 45H is a schematic diagram of the signal waveform of the voltage signal HV1
  • FIG. 45I is a schematic waveform diagram of the voltage signal HV2
  • FIG. 45J is a schematic waveform diagram of the voltage signal HV2
  • Fig. 45K is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the voltage signal HV1 or HV2.
  • FIG. 48F is a flowchart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the emergency control module 3140 will first detect the obtained voltage signal HV1 (step S501), and determine whether the voltage signal HV1 crosses zero within a certain period of time (step S502). If the emergency control module 3140 determines yes in step S502, it means that the currently received external drive signal is an AC signal, and the installation detection module 3000a enters the detection mode; if the emergency detection module 3140 determines no in step S502, It means that the received external drive signal is a DC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the emergency mode, and the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switch circuit 3200a to operate in the first configuration (step S503), in which all The first configuration can be, for example, a turn-on configuration.
  • the emergency control module 3140 in addition to maintaining the switch circuit 320a in the first configuration, the emergency control module 3140 will further detect the voltage signal HV1 to determine whether the voltage signal HV1 has zero-crossing. When the signal HV1 crosses zero (step S504), it is determined that the external drive signal is switched from a DC signal to an AC signal. At this time, the emergency control module 3140 will make the installation detection module 3000a enter the detection mode; when it is determined that the voltage signal HV1 has no zero-crossing, the switch Circuit 3200a continues to remain in the first configuration.
  • step S504 may be omitted, and the detection of the emergency control module is only performed when the LED lamp is powered on.
  • FIG. 19H and FIG. 19I can also use the method of detecting the zero-crossing signal to determine whether the external driving signal is a DC signal, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 48G is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the emergency control module 3140 will first detect the obtained voltage signal HV1 (step S601), and determine whether the voltage signal HV1 has a rising edge/falling edge signal within a certain period of time (step S602). If the emergency control module 3140 determines yes in step S602, it means that the currently received external drive signal is an AC signal, and the installation detection module 3000a enters the detection mode; if the emergency detection module 3140 determines no in step S502, It means that the received external drive signal is a DC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the emergency mode, and the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switch circuit 3200a to operate in the first configuration (step S603), wherein the The first configuration may be, for example, a conductive configuration.
  • the emergency control module 3140 in addition to maintaining the switch circuit 320a in the first configuration, the emergency control module 3140 will further detect the voltage signal HV1 to determine whether the voltage signal HV1 has a rising edge/falling edge signal, When it is detected that the voltage signal HV1 has a rising edge/falling edge signal (step S604), it is determined that the external driving signal is switched from a DC signal to an AC signal, and the emergency control module 3140 will make the installation detection module 3000a enter the detection mode at this time; When the voltage signal HV1 has no rising edge/falling edge signal, the switch circuit 3200a continues to maintain the first configuration.
  • step S604 may be omitted, and the detection of the emergency control module is only performed when the LED lamp is powered on.
  • FIG. 19H and FIG. 19I can also use the method of over-detecting the rising edge/falling edge of the voltage signal to determine whether the external driving signal is a DC signal, which will not be repeated here.
  • the emergency detection module makes the installation detection module work in different states by detecting whether the external driving signal is a DC signal.
  • the DC signal is a driving signal obtained after the battery is boosted, and one of the output ends of the driving signal contacts the human body, and there is no risk of electric shock.
  • the voltage of such a DC signal is generally lower than that of the commercial power supply. If the installation detection function is used, the installation detection module may misjudge, and the LED straight tube lamp cannot be lit normally. Therefore, when the external driving signal is AC AC, the installation detection module works normally and performs installation detection; when the external driving signal is a DC signal, the installation detection module 3000a skips the detection stage and directly makes the switch circuit 3200a in an on state.
  • FIG. 20A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module 3000b includes a detection pulse generation module 3210, a detection result latch circuit 3220, a detection determination circuit 3230, and a switch circuit 3200b.
  • the following description is combined with the signal timing shown in FIG. 45B , wherein FIG. 45B is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the power module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3210 is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3220 for generating the control signal Sc including at least one pulse signal DP.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 is electrically connected to the switch circuit 3200b for receiving and outputting the control signal Sc output by the detection pulse generating module 3210 .
  • the switch circuit 3200b is respectively electrically connected to one end of the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp and the detection and determination circuit 3230 for receiving the control signal Sc output by the detection result latch circuit 3220 and conducts during the pulse signal DP, so that the LED straight tube lamp is turned on during the period of the pulse signal DP.
  • the power circuit is turned on.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 is electrically connected to the switch circuit 3200b, the other end of the LED straight tube lamp power circuit, and the detection result latch circuit 3220, respectively, for detecting the sampling signal on the power circuit when the switch circuit 3200b and the LED power circuit are turned on Ssp is used to judge the installation status of the LED straight tube lamp and the lamp holder.
  • the power circuit of this embodiment is used as a detection path for installing the detection module (the above-mentioned embodiment in FIG. 19A also has a similar configuration).
  • the detection determination circuit 3230 further transmits the detection result to the detection result latch circuit 3220 for further control; in addition, the detection pulse generation module 3210 is further electrically connected to the output of the detection result latch circuit 3220 to control the output of the cut-off pulse signal DP. time.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3210 is further electrically connected to the output of the detection result latch circuit 3220 to control the output of the cut-off pulse signal DP. time.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3210 generates a control signal Sc via the detection result latch circuit 3220, so that the switch circuit 3200b operates in an on state during the pulse.
  • the power loop of the LED straight tube light between the installation detection ends TE1 and TE2 will also be turned on at the same time.
  • the detection determination circuit 3230 detects a sampling signal on the power supply circuit, and informs the detection result latch circuit 3220 of a time point to latch the detection signal based on the detected signal.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 may be, for example, a circuit for controlling the output level of the latch circuit, wherein the output level of the latch circuit corresponds to the on/off state of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 stores the detection result according to the sampling signal Ssp (or the sampling signal Ssp and the pulse signal DP), and transmits or provides the detection result to the switch circuit 3200b. After receiving the detection result transmitted by the detection result latch circuit 3220, the switch circuit 3200b controls the conduction state between the mounting detection terminals TE1 and TE2 according to the detection result.
  • the installation detection module 3000b further includes an emergency control module 3240 .
  • the configuration and operation of the emergency control module 3240 are similar to those of the emergency control module 3140 in the foregoing embodiment, so reference can be made to the above description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3210 , the detection determination circuit 3230 , the detection result latch circuit 3220 and the switch circuit 3200b in the installation detection module 3000b can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 20B to 20E respectively (but not limited to 20B to 20E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
  • FIG. 20B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generation module installed with a detection module according to a second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3210 includes: a resistor R21 (sixth resistor), one end of which is connected to a driving voltage; a capacitor C21 (fourth capacitor), one end of which is connected to the other end of the resistor R21, and the other end of the capacitor C21 is grounded;
  • the special trigger STRG has an input end and an output end, the input end is connected to the connection end of the resistor R21 and the capacitor C21, the output end is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3220; a resistor R22 (the seventh resistor), one end is connected to the resistor The connection terminal of R21 and the capacitor C21; a transistor M21 (the second transistor), which has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal, the collector terminal is connected to the other end of the resistor R22, and the emitter terminal is grounded; and
  • the detection pulse generating module 3210 further includes a Zener diode ZD1 with an anode terminal and a cathode terminal, the anode terminal is connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C21 to ground, and the cathode terminal is connected to one terminal of the capacitor C21 and the resistor R21.
  • the circuits of the detection pulse generation module in this embodiment and the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 19B are only examples. In fact, the specific operation of the detection pulse generation circuit is performed based on the functional modules configured in the embodiment in FIG. 40 . This part will be shown in FIG. 40 . The examples are described in further detail.
  • FIG. 20C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination circuit of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 includes: a resistor R24 (the ninth resistor), one end of which is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor M22, and the other end of the resistor R24 is connected to the other end of the LED power loop (for example: the second installation detection terminal TE2); a diode D21 (second diode), with an anode terminal and a cathode terminal, the anode terminal is connected to one end of the resistor R24; a comparator CP21 (second comparator), with a first input terminal, a second input terminal and An output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to a setting signal (for example: the reference voltage Vref, in this embodiment is 1.3V, but not limited to this), the second input terminal is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode D21, and the comparator The output terminal of CP
  • the diode D21, the comparator CP22, the resistor R25, the resistor R26 and the capacitor C22 can be omitted.
  • the second input end of the comparator CP21 is directly connected to one end of the resistor R24.
  • the resistor R24 may be two resistors connected in parallel, and the equivalent resistance value thereof includes 0.1 ohm-5 ohm.
  • FIG. 20D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection result latch circuit of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 includes: a D-type flip-flop DFF (second D-type flip-flop), which has a data input end, a frequency input end and an output end, the data input end is connected to the driving voltage, the frequency input end The terminal is connected to the detection and determination circuit 3230; and an OR gate OG (third OR gate) has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to the output of the Schmitt trigger STRG terminal, the second input terminal is connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF, and the output terminal of the OR gate OG is connected to the other terminal of the resistor R23 and the switch circuit 3200b.
  • DFF second D-type flip-flop
  • FIG. 20E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch circuit for installing a detection module according to a second embodiment of the present application.
  • the switch circuit 3200b includes: a transistor M22 (third transistor), which has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal, the base terminal is connected to the output terminal of the OR gate OG, and the collector terminal is connected to one end of the LED power circuit (for example: The first installation detection terminal TE1), the emitter terminal is connected to the detection and determination circuit 3230.
  • the transistor M22 can also be replaced with equivalent components of other electronic switches, such as MOSFETs.
  • the above-mentioned part of the circuit of the installation detection module can be integrated into an integrated circuit, thereby saving the circuit cost and volume of the installation detection module.
  • the Schmitt trigger STRG of the detection pulse generation module 3210, the detection result latch circuit 3220 and the two comparators CP21 and CP22 of the detection determination circuit 3230 are integrated into an integrated circuit, but the present application is not limited thereto.
  • this application utilizes the principle that the capacitor voltage will not undergo sudden change; the capacitor in the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp has zero voltage at both ends and the transient response is in a short-circuit state before the power supply circuit is turned on; and when When the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp holder, the transient response current limiting resistance of the power circuit is small and the response peak current is large. When the power circuit is not correctly installed in the lamp holder, the transient response of the power circuit is The principle of large current limiting resistance and small response peak current is implemented, and the leakage current of the LED straight tube lamp is less than 5MIU.
  • Rfuse is the resistance value of the fuse of the LED straight tube lamp (10 ohms), and 500 ohms is the resistance value of the transient response to simulate the conductive characteristics of the human body; and in the numerator part, take the voltage root mean square The maximum voltage value (305*1.414) of 90V ⁇ 305V and the minimum voltage difference of 50V. It can be known from the above examples that if both ends of the LED straight tube lamp are correctly installed in the lamp holder, the minimum transient current during normal operation is 5A; but when one end of the LED straight tube lamp is installed in the lamp holder, the When the other end of the lamp head contacts the human body, its maximum transient current is only 845mA.
  • the present application utilizes the current that can flow through the capacitor in the LED power supply loop (for example, the filter capacitor of the filter circuit) through the transient response to detect the installation status of the LED straight tube lamp and the lamp holder, that is, to detect whether the LED straight tube lamp is It is correctly installed in the lamp socket, and when the LED straight tube light is not properly installed in the lamp socket, a protection mechanism is provided to avoid the problem of electric shock caused by the user accidentally touching the conductive part of the LED straight tube light.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments are only used to illustrate the present application rather than to limit the implementation of the present application.
  • the output of the detection pulse generation module 3210 rises from a first low-level voltage to A first high level voltage is output to the detection result latch circuit 3220 through a path 3211 .
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 After receiving the first high-level voltage, the detection result latch circuit 3220 simultaneously outputs a second high-level voltage to the switch circuit 3200b and the detection pulse generating module 3210 through a path 3221 .
  • the switch circuit 3200b After the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage, the switch circuit 3200b is turned on so that a power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200b, the path 3201, the detection and determination circuit 3230 and the The second installation detection terminal TE2) is turned on; at the same time, the detection pulse generating module 3210 receives the second high-level voltage returned by the detection result latch circuit 3220 for a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse width ), its output drops from the first high-level voltage back to the first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage, the first high-level voltage and the second low-level voltage form a the first pulse signal DP1).
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 detects a first sampling signal SP1 (eg, a voltage signal) on the loop when the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on.
  • a first sampling signal SP1 eg, a voltage signal
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third high-level voltage (the third high-level voltage) through a path 3231 A high level signal) is sent to the detection result latch circuit 3220.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third high-level voltage and outputs and maintains a second high-level voltage (second high-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage and then The power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is maintained to be turned on, during which the detection pulse generating module 3210 no longer generates pulse output.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 When the first sampling signal SP1 is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above-mentioned application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp has not been correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third low-level voltage (No. A low level signal) to the detection result latch circuit 3220.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third low-level voltage and outputs and maintains the second low-level voltage (second low-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second low-level voltage and maintains Turn off to keep the power circuit of the LED straight tube light open. In this case, the problem of electric shock due to accidental contact of the conductive part of the LED straight tube light by the user when the LED straight tube light is not properly installed in the lamp socket can be avoided.
  • the output of the detection pulse generation module 3210 rises from the first low-level voltage to the first high-level voltage again, and is output through the path 3211 to the detection result latch circuit 3220.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 After receiving the first high-level voltage, the detection result latch circuit 3220 simultaneously outputs a second high-level voltage to the switch circuit 3200b and the detection pulse generating module 3210 through the path 3221 .
  • the switch circuit 3200b After the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage, the switch circuit 3200b is turned on again so that the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200b, the path 3201, the detection and determination circuit 3230 and the The second installation detection terminal TE2) is also turned on again; at the same time, the detection pulse generating module 3210 receives the second high-level voltage returned by the detection result latch circuit 3220 for a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse width), the output drops from the first high-level voltage back to a first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage for the third time, the first high-level voltage for the second time, and the first low-level voltage for the fourth time The low level voltage constitutes a second pulse signal DP2).
  • the detection pulse generating module 3210 receives the second high-level voltage returned by the detection result latch circuit 3220 for a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse width), the output drops from the
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 When the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on again, the detection and determination circuit 3230 also detects a second sampling signal SP2 (eg, a voltage signal) on the circuit again.
  • a second sampling signal SP2 eg, a voltage signal
  • Vref a reference voltage
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third high-level voltage (the first high level signal) to the detection result latch circuit 3220.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third high-level voltage and outputs and maintains a second high-level voltage (second high-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage and then The power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is maintained to be turned on, during which the detection pulse generating module 3210 no longer generates pulse wave output.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 When the second sampling signal SP2 is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above-mentioned application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp is not properly installed in the lamp socket, so the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third low-level voltage (the first low level signal) to the detection result latch circuit 3220.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third low-level voltage and outputs and maintains a second low-level voltage (second low-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second low-level voltage and then Keep it off to keep the power circuit of the LED straight tube light open.
  • the switch is switched during this period
  • the circuit 3200b will be maintained in the off state, and the driving circuit (not shown) will not be activated.
  • the switch circuit 3200b will be latched by the detection result
  • the high-level voltage output by the circuit 3220 is maintained in a conducting state to keep the power loop conducting.
  • the driving circuit in the power module will be activated and start to operate based on the voltage on the power loop, and then generate the lighting control signal Slc to switch the power switch (not shown), so that the driving current can be generated to light the LED module .
  • a driving voltage charges the capacitor C21 through the resistor R21, and when the voltage of the capacitor C21 rises enough to trigger the Schmitt trigger During STRG, the Schmitt trigger STRG changes from an initial first low-level voltage to a first high-level voltage and outputs to an input terminal of the OR gate OG. After the OR gate OG receives the first high level voltage output from the Schmitt trigger STRG, the OR gate OG outputs a second high level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M22 and the resistor R23.
  • the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor M22 are conducted, thereby making the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp (including at least the first installation detection terminal).
  • TE1 transistor M22, resistor R24 and the second installation detection terminal TE2
  • the set of transistor M21 is The terminal and the emitter terminal are connected to the ground, so that the voltage of the capacitor C21 is discharged to the ground through the resistor R22.
  • the output of the Schmitt trigger STRG starts from the first high level.
  • the voltage drops back to the first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage of the first time, the first high-level voltage of the second time, and the first low-level voltage of the second time constitute a first pulse signal).
  • the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on, the current flowing through the capacitor in the LED power circuit (for example, the filter capacitor of the filter circuit) through the transient response flows through the transistor M22 and the resistor R24, and forms on the resistor R24.
  • a voltage signal the voltage signal is compared with a reference voltage (1.3V in this embodiment, but not limited to) through the comparator CP21, when the voltage signal is greater than and/or equal to the reference voltage, the comparator CP21 outputs A third high-level voltage is applied to the frequency input terminal CLK of the D-type flip-flop DFF.
  • a reference voltage 1.3V in this embodiment, but not limited to
  • the output terminal Q of the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a high-level voltage
  • the voltage is applied to the other input terminal of the OR gate OG, so that the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second high-level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M22, thereby keeping the transistor M22 and the power loop of the LED straight tube light on. Since the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second high-level voltage, the transistor M21 also remains on and grounded, so that the voltage of the capacitor C21 cannot rise enough to trigger the Schmitt trigger STRG.
  • the comparator CP21 When the voltage signal on the resistor R24 is less than the reference voltage, the comparator CP21 outputs a third low-level voltage to the frequency input terminal CLK of the D-type flip-flop DFF, and since the initial output value of the D-type flip-flop DFF is zero, Therefore, the output terminal Q of the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a low level voltage to the other input terminal of the OR gate OG, and the Schmitt trigger STRG connected to one end of the OR gate OG also restores to output the first low level voltage Therefore, the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second low-level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M22, so that the transistor M22 is kept off and the power circuit of the LED straight tube light is kept open. However, since the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second low level voltage, the transistor M21 is also kept in the off state, and the capacitor C21 is charged through the resistor R21 to repeat the next (pulse) detection after the driving voltage.
  • the pulse period is determined by the resistance value of the resistor R21 and the capacitance value of the capacitor C21.
  • the set time interval (TIV) of the pulse signal is 3ms-500ms, and further, the pulse signal The time interval is 20ms-50ms; in some embodiments, the set time interval (TIV) of the pulse signal is 500ms-2000ms.
  • the pulse width is determined by the resistance value of the resistor R22 and the capacitance value of the capacitor C21. In some embodiments, the width of the pulse signal includes 1us-100us, and further, the width of the pulse signal includes 10us-20us.
  • Zener diode ZD1 provides protection function, but it can be omitted; resistor R24 can be two resistors in parallel based on power factor considerations, and its equivalent resistance value includes 0.1 ohm-5 ohm; resistors R25 and R26 provide voltage divider to ensure the input voltage Higher than the reference voltage of the comparator CP22 (0.3V in this embodiment, but not limited to this); the capacitor C22 provides voltage stabilization and filtering functions; the diode D21 ensures the unidirectionality of signal transmission.
  • the installation detection module disclosed in the present application can be applied to other LED lighting equipment with dual-terminal power supply, such as: LED lamps with a dual-terminal power supply structure, and those including direct use of mains power or use of town power
  • the signal output by the current transformer is used as an LED lamp of an external driving voltage, etc., and the application does not limit the application scope of the installation detection module.
  • FIG. 21A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module 3000c may include a pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 , an integrated control module 3320 , a switch circuit 3200b and a detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 .
  • the overall operation of the installation detection module of this embodiment is similar to that of the installation detection module of the second preferred embodiment, so reference may be made to the signal timing shown in FIG. 45B .
  • the integrated control module 3320 at least includes two input terminals IN1, IN2 and three pins such as an output terminal OT.
  • the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 is electrically connected to the input terminal IN1 and the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 for assisting the integrated control module 3320 to generate a control signal.
  • the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 is electrically connected to the input terminal IN2 of the integrated control module 3320 and the switch circuit 3200c, and can be used to return the sampling signal associated with the power circuit to the integrated control module when the switch circuit 3200c is connected to the LED power circuit
  • the input terminal IN2 of the 3320 enables the integrated control module 3320 to determine the installation state of the LED straight tube lamp and the lamp holder based on the sampling signal.
  • the switch circuit 3200c is electrically connected to one end of the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp and the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330, respectively, for receiving the control signal output by the integrated control module 3320, and during the enabling period (ie, the pulse period) of the control signal Conduction, so that the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on.
  • the integrated control module 3320 can temporarily turn on the switch circuit 3200c by outputting a control signal with at least one pulse from the output terminal OT in a detection mode according to the signal received on the input terminal IN1.
  • the integrated control module 3320 can detect whether the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket according to the signal on the input terminal IN2 and latch the detection result as a switch whether to turn on after the detection mode ends.
  • the basis of the circuit 3200c ie, to determine whether to supply power to the LED module normally). The detailed circuit structure and the overall circuit operation of the third preferred embodiment will be described below.
  • the integrated control module 3320, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310, the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330, and the switch circuit 3200c in the installation detection module 3000c can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 21B to 21E respectively (but not limited to) 21B to 21E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
  • FIG. 21B is a schematic block diagram of an internal circuit of an integrated control module for installing a detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • the integrated control module 3320 includes a pulse generating unit 3322 , a detection result latching unit 3323 and a detection unit 3324 .
  • the pulse generating unit 3322 receives the signal provided by the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 from the input terminal IN1, and generates at least one pulse signal accordingly, and the generated pulse signal is provided to the detection result latch unit 3323.
  • the pulse generating unit 3322 can be implemented by, for example, a Schmitt trigger (not shown, please refer to the Schmitt trigger STRG in FIG.
  • the pulse generating unit 3322 of the present application is not limited to be implemented by using the circuit structure of the Schmitt trigger. Any analog/digital circuit structure that can realize the function of generating at least one pulse signal can be applied here.
  • the detection result latch unit 3323 is coupled to the pulse generation unit 3322 and the detection unit 3324 .
  • the detection result latch unit 3323 provides the pulse signal generated by the pulse generation unit 3322 as a control signal to the output terminal OT.
  • the detection result latching unit 3323 will also latch the detection result signal provided by the detection unit 3324, and provide it to the output terminal OT after the detection mode, so as to determine whether the LED straight tube lamp is installed correctly or not.
  • the switch circuit 3200c is turned on.
  • the detection result latch unit 3323 may be implemented by, for example, a circuit structure of a D-type flip-flop with an OR gate (not shown, refer to the D-type flip-flop DFF and OR gate OG in FIG. 20D ).
  • the D-type flip-flop has a data input end, a frequency input end and an output end.
  • the data input terminal is connected to the driving voltage VCC, and the frequency input terminal is connected to the detection unit 3324 .
  • the OR gate has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to the pulse generating unit 3322, the second input terminal is connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop, and the output terminal of the OR gate Connect the output terminal OT.
  • the detection result latching unit 3323 of the present application is not limited to be implemented by using a circuit structure of a D-type flip-flop and an OR gate. Any analog/digital circuit architecture that can realize the function of latching and outputting a control signal to control the switching of the switch circuit 3200c can be applied here.
  • the detection unit 3324 is coupled to the detection result latch unit 3323 .
  • the detection unit 3324 will receive the signal provided by the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 lock from the input terminal IN2, and accordingly generate a detection result signal indicating whether the LED straight tube light is correctly installed, and the generated detection result signal will be provided to the detection result lock.
  • the detection unit 3324 may be implemented by, for example, a comparator (not shown, please refer to the comparator CP21 in FIG. 20C ).
  • the comparator has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to a setting signal, the second input terminal is connected to the input terminal IN2, and the output terminal of the comparator CP21 is connected to the detection terminal Result latch unit 3323.
  • the detection unit 3324 of the present application is not limited to be implemented using the circuit structure of the comparator. Any analog/digital circuit structure that can realize whether the LED straight tube light is installed correctly according to the signal on the input terminal IN2 can be applied here.
  • FIG. 21C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a pulse generation auxiliary circuit for installing a detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 includes resistors R31 , R32 and R33 , a capacitor C31 and a transistor M31 .
  • One end of the resistor R31 is connected to a driving voltage (eg VCC).
  • One end of the capacitor C31 is connected to the other end of the resistor R31, and the other end of the capacitor C31 is grounded.
  • One end of the resistor R32 is connected to the connecting end of the resistor R31 and the capacitor C31.
  • the transistor M31 has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal.
  • the collector terminal is connected to the other terminal of the resistor R32, and the emitter terminal is grounded.
  • One end of the resistor R33 is connected to the base end of the transistor M31 , and the other end of the resistor R33 is connected to the output end OT of the integrated control module 3310 and the control end of the switch circuit 3200c via the path 3311 .
  • the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 further includes a Zener diode ZD1, which has an anode terminal and a cathode terminal, the anode terminal is connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C31 and grounded, and the cathode terminal is connected to one terminal of the capacitor 3323 and the resistor R31.
  • FIG. 21D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination auxiliary circuit of the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 includes resistors R34, R35 and R36, a capacitor C32 and a diode D31.
  • One end of the resistor R34 is connected to one end of the switch circuit 3200c, and the other end of the resistor R34 is connected to the other end of the LED power loop (eg, the second installation detection terminal TE2).
  • One end of the resistor R35 is connected to the driving voltage (eg VCC).
  • resistor R36 One end of the resistor R36 is connected to the other end of the resistor R35, and is connected to the input terminal IN2 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3331, and the other end of the resistor R36 is grounded.
  • Capacitor C32 is connected in parallel with resistor R36.
  • the diode D31 has an anode end and a cathode end, the anode end is connected to one end of the resistor R34, and the cathode end is connected to the connection end of the resistors R35 and R36.
  • the above-mentioned resistor R35 , resistor R36 , capacitor C32 and diode D31 may be omitted.
  • the resistor R34 When the diode D31 is omitted, one end of the resistor R34 is directly connected to the input terminal IN2 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3331 .
  • the resistor R34 may be two resistors connected in parallel, and the equivalent resistance value thereof includes 0.1 ohm to 5 ohm.
  • FIG. 21E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch circuit for installing a detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • the switch circuit 3200c includes the transistor M32, which has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal.
  • the base terminal of the transistor M32 is connected to the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3321, the collector terminal of the transistor M32 is connected to one end of the LED power supply loop (for example: the first installation detection terminal TE1), and the emitter terminal of the transistor M32 is connected to the detection determination Auxiliary circuit 3330.
  • the transistor M32 can also be replaced with equivalent components of other electronic switches, such as MOSFETs.
  • the installation detection principle used by the installation detection module of this embodiment is the same as that of the second preferred embodiment, which is based on the principle that the capacitor voltage will not change abruptly.
  • the LED straight tube lamp power circuit Before the power loop is turned on, the voltage at both ends of the capacitor is zero and the transient response is in a short-circuit state; and when the power loop is correctly installed in the lamp socket of the LED straight tube lamp, its transient response current limiting resistance is small and The response peak current is large. When the power supply circuit is not properly installed in the lamp holder, the transient response current limiting resistance is large and the response peak current is small. The current is less than 5MIU.
  • the driving voltage VCC will be provided to the module/circuit in the installation detection module 3000c under the condition that one end of the LED straight tube lamp is powered.
  • the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 performs a charging operation in response to the driving voltage VCC. After a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse period), the output voltage (herein referred to as the first output voltage) rises from a first low-level voltage to exceed a forward threshold voltage (the voltage value can be defined according to circuit design) ), and output to the input terminal IN1 of the integrated control module 3320 via a path 3311 .
  • the integrated control module 3320 After receiving the first output voltage from the input terminal IN1, the integrated control module 3320 outputs an enabled control signal (eg, a high-level voltage) to the switch circuit 3200c and the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 through a path 3321 .
  • the switch circuit 3200c After the switch circuit 3200c receives the enable control signal, the switch circuit 3200c is turned on so that a power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200c, the path 3201, the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 and the The second installation detection terminal TE2) is turned on; and at the same time, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 will turn on the discharge path in response to the enabled control signal to perform the discharge action, and receive the feedback returned by the integrated control module 3320.
  • an enabled control signal eg, a high-level voltage
  • the switch circuit 3200c After the switch circuit 3200c receives the enable control signal, the switch circuit 3200c is turned on so that a power circuit
  • the first output voltage gradually drops back to the first low-level voltage from a voltage level exceeding the forward threshold voltage.
  • the integrated control module 3320 will pull down the enabled control signal to the disable level in response to the first output voltage bit (ie, output a disabled control signal, wherein the disabled control signal is, for example, a low-level voltage), so that the control signal has a signal waveform in the form of a pulse (ie, by the first low-level voltage in the control signal)
  • the bit voltage, the high-level voltage and the second low-level voltage constitute a first pulse signal).
  • the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 detects a first sampling signal (eg, a voltage signal) on the loop when the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on, and provides the first sampling signal to the integrated control module through the input terminal IN2 3320.
  • a first sampling signal eg, a voltage signal
  • the integrated control module 3320 determines that the first sampling signal is greater than or equal to a setting signal (eg, a reference voltage), according to the application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the integrated control
  • the module 3320 outputs and maintains the enabled control signal to the switch circuit 3200c, and the switch circuit 3200c receives the enabled control signal and maintains conduction to keep the power loop of the LED straight tube light on, during which the integrated control module 3320 is no longer Generate pulse output.
  • the integrated control circuit 3320 determines that the first sampling signal is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp has not been correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the integrated control circuit will output and maintain The disabled control signal is sent to the switch circuit 3200c, and the switch circuit 3200c receives the disabled control signal and keeps it off to keep the power circuit of the LED straight tube light open.
  • the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 Since the discharge path of the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 is cut off, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 performs the charging operation again. Therefore, when the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp is kept open for a period of time (ie, the pulse cycle time), the first output voltage of the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 rises again from the first low-level voltage to exceed the forward threshold voltage, and It is output to the input terminal IN1 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3311 . After receiving the first output voltage from the input terminal IN1, the integrated control module 3320 will pull up the control signal from the disable level to the enable level again (ie, output the enabled control signal), and turn the enabled control signal Provided to the switch circuit 3200c and the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310.
  • the switch circuit 3200c After the switch circuit 3200c receives the enable control signal, the switch circuit 3200c is turned on so that the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200c, the path 3201, the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 and the The two installation detection terminals TE2) are also turned on again.
  • the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 will turn on the discharge path again in response to the enabled control signal and perform the discharge operation, and after receiving the enabled control signal returned by the integrated control module 3320 for a period of time ( This period of time determines the pulse width), and the first output voltage gradually drops back to the first low-level voltage again from a voltage level exceeding the forward threshold voltage.
  • the integrated control module 3320 when the first output voltage drops below the reverse threshold voltage, the integrated control module 3320 will pull down the enabled control signal to the disabled level in response to the first output voltage, so that the control signal has a signal in the form of a pulse waveform (ie, a second pulse signal is formed by the third low level voltage, the second high level voltage and the fourth low level voltage in the control signal).
  • the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 also detects a second sampling signal (eg, a voltage signal) on the loop when the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on again, and provides the second sampling signal to the input terminal IN2 through the input terminal IN2.
  • a second sampling signal eg, a voltage signal
  • the second sampling signal is greater than and/or equal to the setting signal (for example: a reference voltage)
  • the setting signal for example: a reference voltage
  • the integrated control module 3320 determines that the second sampling signal is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp is not properly installed in the lamp socket, so the integrated control circuit will output and maintain the disabled
  • the control signal is sent to the switch circuit 3200c, and the switch circuit 3200c receives the disabled control signal and keeps it off to keep the power loop of the LED straight tube light open. In this case, the problem of electric shock due to accidental contact of the conductive part of the LED straight tube light by the user when the LED straight tube light is not properly installed in the lamp socket can be avoided.
  • the detection result latching unit 3323 After the detection result latching unit 3323 receives the first high-level voltage output from the pulse generating unit 3322, the detection result latching unit 3323 outputs a second high-level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M32 through the output terminal OT and Resistor R33.
  • the base terminal of the transistor M32 receives the second high-level voltage output from the detection result latch unit 3323, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor M32 are turned on, thereby making the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp (including at least the first The mounting detection terminal TE1, the transistor M32, the resistor R34 and the second mounting detection terminal TE2) are connected.
  • the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor M31 are connected to ground, so that the voltage of the capacitor C31 is discharged to the ground through the resistor R32 , when the voltage of the capacitor C31 is not enough to trigger the pulse generating unit 3322, the output of the pulse generating unit 3322 drops from the first high-level voltage back to the first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage of the first time, the first low-level voltage of the first The high-level voltage and the second first low-level voltage constitute a first pulse signal).
  • the current flowing through the capacitor in the LED power circuit (for example, the filter capacitor of the filter circuit) through the transient response flows through the transistor M32 and the resistor R34, and forms on the resistor R34.
  • a voltage signal is provided to the input terminal IN2 so that the detection unit 3324 can compare the voltage signal with a reference voltage.
  • the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal is greater than or equal to the reference voltage, the detection unit 3324 outputs a third high-level voltage to the detection result latch unit 3323 .
  • the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is lower than the reference voltage, the detection unit 3324 outputs a third low-level voltage to the detection result latch unit 3323 .
  • the detection result latching unit 3323 latches the third high-level voltage/third low-level voltage provided by the detection unit 3324, and then performs an OR logic operation on the latched signal and the signal provided by the pulse generating unit 3322 , and the output control signal is determined to be the second high-level voltage or the second low-level voltage according to the result of the OR logic operation.
  • the detection result latch unit 3323 latches the third high-level voltage output by the detection unit 3324, so as to maintain the output of the second voltage.
  • the high-level voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor M32, so that the transistor M32 and the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp are kept on. Since the detection result latch unit 3323 outputs and maintains the second high-level voltage, the transistor M31 is also kept on and grounded, so that the voltage of the capacitor C31 cannot rise enough to trigger the pulse generating unit 3322 .
  • the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is less than the reference voltage
  • the detection unit 3324 and the pulse generation unit 3322 both provide low-level voltages. Therefore, after the OR logic operation, the detection result latch unit 3323 will output and The second low level voltage is maintained to the base terminal of the transistor M32, so that the transistor M32 is kept off and the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is kept open.
  • the control signal on the output terminal OT is maintained at the second low-level voltage at this time, the transistor M31 is also maintained in the off state, and the capacitor C31 is charged through the resistor R31 after the driving voltage VCC to repeat the next time ( pulse) detection.
  • the detection mode described in this embodiment can be defined as the driving voltage VCC has been supplied to the installation detection module 3000c, but the detection unit 3324 has not yet determined that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is greater than or equal to the reference voltage. period.
  • the detection mode since the control signal output by the detection result latch unit 3323 will repeatedly turn on and off the transistor M31, the discharge path is periodically turned on and off.
  • the capacitor C31 is periodically charged and discharged in response to the on/off of the transistor M31. Therefore, the detection result latch unit 3323 outputs a control signal with a periodic pulse waveform in the detection mode.
  • the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is greater than or equal to the reference voltage, or the driving voltage VCC is stopped, the detection mode can be regarded as ending (it has been determined that the installation is correct, or the LED tube has been removed). At this time, the detection result latch unit 3323 outputs a control signal maintained at the second high-level voltage or the second low-level voltage.
  • the integrated control module 3320 of this embodiment may be formed by integrating some circuit components of the detection pulse generation module 3210 , the detection result latch circuit 3220 and the detection determination circuit 3230 , instead of The integrated circuit components constitute the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 and the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 in this embodiment, respectively.
  • the function/circuit structure of the pulse generation unit 3322 in the integrated control module 3320 and the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 can be equivalent to the detection pulse generation module 3210 of the second preferred embodiment, and the detection result latching unit in the integrated control module 3320
  • the function/circuit structure of 3323 can be equivalent to the detection result latching module 3220 of the second preferred embodiment, and the function/circuit structure of the detection unit 3324 in the integrated control module 3320 and the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 can be equivalent to the detection and determination circuit 3230.
  • FIG. 22A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module of this embodiment may be, for example, a three-terminal switch device 3000d including a power terminal VP1, a first switch terminal SP1 and a second switch terminal SP2.
  • the power terminal VP1 of the three-terminal switching device 3000d is suitable for receiving the driving voltage VCC
  • the first switching terminal SP1 is suitable for connecting one of the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 (shown as The first installation detection terminal TE1 is connected, but not limited to this)
  • the second switch terminal SP2 is suitable for connecting the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2. Two install the detection terminal TE2, but not limited to this).
  • the three-terminal switching device 3000d includes a signal processing unit 3420, a signal generating unit 3410, a signal collecting unit 3430, and a switching unit 3200d.
  • the three-terminal switching device 3000d may further include an internal power detection unit 3440 .
  • the signal processing unit 3420 can output a control signal with a pulse waveform in the detection mode according to the signals provided by the signal generation unit 3410 and the signal acquisition unit 3430, and output a control signal maintained at a high voltage level or a low voltage level after the detection mode.
  • the control signal is used to control the conduction state of the switch unit 3200d, so as to determine whether to turn on the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the signal generating unit 3410 can generate a pulse signal to the signal processing unit 3420 when receiving the driving voltage VCC.
  • the pulse signal generated by the signal generating unit 3410 may be generated according to a reference signal received from the outside, or independently generated by itself, which is not limited in this application.
  • the "external” mentioned here is relative to the signal generating unit 3410, that is, as long as the reference signal is not generated by the signal generating unit 3410, whether it is generated by other circuits in the three-terminal switching device 3000d, or generated by the three-terminal switching device 3000d.
  • the reference signals generated by the external circuit of the end switch device 3000d belong to the reference signals received from the outside as described herein.
  • the signal acquisition unit 3430 can be used to sample the electrical signal on the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp, and detect the installation state of the LED straight tube lamp according to the sampled signal, and then transmit the detection result signal indicating the detection result to the signal processing unit 3420 to be processed.
  • the three-terminal switching device 3000d can be implemented by an integrated circuit, that is, the three-terminal switching device can be a three-terminal switching control chip, which can be applied to any type of double-terminal feeding. In the LED straight tube lamp, it can provide the function of preventing electric shock.
  • the three-terminal switch device 3000d is not limited to include only three pins/connecting terminals, but three of the plurality of pins are configured in the above-mentioned manner, all of which belong to this embodiment. scope to be protected.
  • the signal processing unit 3420 , the signal generation unit 3410 , the signal acquisition unit 3430 , the switch unit 3200d and the internal power detection unit 3440 can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 22B to 22F respectively (but not limited thereto) 22B to 22F are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
  • FIG. 22B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal processing unit in which a detection module is installed according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the signal processing unit 3420 includes a driver DRV, an OR gate OG, and a D-type flip-flop DFF.
  • the driver DRV has an input terminal and an output terminal, and the output terminal of the driver DRV is used to connect the switch unit 3200d via the path 3421, so as to provide a control signal to the switch unit 3200d.
  • the OR gate OG has a first input terminal, a second input terminal, and an output terminal.
  • the first input terminal of the OR gate OG is connected to the signal generating unit 3410 via the path 3411, and the output terminal of the OR gate OG is coupled to the input terminal of the driver DRV.
  • the D-type flip-flop DFF has a data input terminal (D), a frequency input terminal (CK) and an output terminal (Q).
  • the data input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF receives the driving voltage VCC, the frequency input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF is connected to the signal acquisition unit 3430 through the path 3431, and the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop is coupled to the second input of the OR gate OG end.
  • FIG. 22C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal generating unit of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the signal generating unit 3410 includes resistors R41 and R42, a capacitor C41, a switch M41 and a comparator CP41.
  • One end of the resistor R41 receives the driving voltage VCC, and the resistor R41 , the resistor R42 and the capacitor C41 are connected in series between the driving voltage VCC and the ground terminal.
  • the switch M41 is connected in parallel with the capacitor C41.
  • the comparator CP41 has a first input terminal, a second input terminal, and an output terminal.
  • the first input terminal of the comparator CP41 is coupled to the connection terminals of the resistors R41 and R42, the second input terminal of the comparator CP41 receives a reference voltage Vref1, and the output terminal of the comparator CP41 is coupled to the control terminal of the switch M41.
  • FIG. 22D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal acquisition unit installed with a detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the signal acquisition unit 3430 includes an OR gate OG and comparators CP42 and CP43.
  • the OR gate OG has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, and the output terminal of the OR gate OG is connected to the signal processing unit 3420 via a path 3431 .
  • the first input terminal of the comparator CP42 is connected to one end of the switch unit 3200d (ie, on the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp) via the path 2962, and the second input terminal of the comparator CP42 receives a first reference voltage (eg 1.25V, But not limited thereto), and the output terminal of the comparator CP42 is coupled to the first input terminal of the OR gate OG.
  • the first input terminal of the comparator CP43 receives a second reference voltage (such as 0.15V, but not limited thereto), the second input terminal of the comparator CP43 is coupled to the first input terminal of the comparator CP42, and the The output terminal is coupled to the second input terminal of the OR gate OG.
  • FIG. 22E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch unit installed with a detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the switch unit 3200d includes a transistor M42 having a gate terminal, a drain terminal and a source terminal.
  • the gate terminal of the transistor M42 is connected to the signal processing unit 3420 via the path 3421
  • the drain terminal of the transistor M42 is connected to the first switching terminal SP1 via the path 3201
  • the source terminal of the transistor M42 is connected to the second switching terminal SP2 and the comparator via the path 3202.
  • the first input of CP42 and the second input of comparator CP43 is connected to the second switching terminal SP2 and the comparator via the path 3202.
  • FIG. 22F is a schematic circuit block diagram of the internal power detection unit of the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the internal power detection unit 3440 includes a clamping circuit 3442, a reference voltage generating circuit 3443, a voltage adjusting circuit 3444, and a Schmitt trigger STRG.
  • the clamping circuit 3442 and the voltage adjusting circuit 3444 are respectively coupled to the power terminal VP1 to receive the driving voltage VCC, so as to perform voltage clamping and voltage adjustment on the driving voltage VCC, respectively.
  • the reference voltage generating circuit 3443 is coupled to the voltage adjusting circuit for generating a reference voltage for the voltage adjusting circuit 3444 .
  • the Schmitt trigger STRG has an input terminal and an output terminal.
  • the input terminal is coupled to the clamping circuit 3442 and the voltage adjustment circuit 3444, and the output terminal outputs the driving voltage to indicate whether the driving voltage VCC is normally supplied.
  • a power confirmation signal if the driving voltage VCC is in a normal supply state, the Schmitt trigger STRG will output an enabled (eg high level) power supply confirmation signal, so that the driving voltage VCC is supplied to the components/components in the three-terminal switching device 3000d. circuit. On the contrary, if the driving voltage VCC is in an abnormal state, the Schmitt trigger STRG will output a disabled (eg, low level) power confirmation signal, so as to prevent the components/circuits in the three-terminal switching device 3000d from working abnormally damaged under the driving voltage VCC.
  • the driving voltage VCC when the LED straight tube lamp is replaced in the lamp socket, the driving voltage VCC will be provided to the three-terminal switching device 3000d through the power terminal VP1. At this time, the driving voltage VCC will charge the capacitor C41 through the resistors R41 and R42. When the capacitor voltage rises to exceed the reference voltage Vref1, the comparator CP41 switches to output a high-level voltage to the first input terminal of the OR gate OG and the control terminal of the switch M41. The switch M41 is turned on in response to the high-level voltage, so that the capacitor C41 starts to discharge to the ground. Through this charging and discharging process, the comparator CP41 outputs an output signal in the form of a pulse.
  • the OR gate OG will output a corresponding high-level voltage to turn on the transistor M42, so that the current flows on the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • a voltage signal corresponding to the magnitude of the current is established on the path 3202 .
  • the comparator CP42 samples the voltage signal and compares it with a first reference voltage (eg, 1.25V).
  • the comparator CP42 When the sampled voltage signal is greater than the first reference voltage (eg, 1.25V), the comparator CP42 will output a high-level voltage.
  • the OR gate OG will generate another high-level voltage to the frequency input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF in response to the high-level voltage output by the comparator CP42.
  • the D-type flip-flop DFF maintains the output high level voltage based on the output of the OR gate OG.
  • the driver DRV generates an enable control signal to turn on the transistor M42 in response to the high level voltage on the input terminal.
  • the transistor M42 can be remain on.
  • the comparator CP42 When the sampled voltage signal is less than the first reference voltage (eg 1.25V), the comparator CP42 will output a low level voltage.
  • the OR gate OG will generate another low-level voltage to the frequency input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF in response to the low-level voltage output by the comparator CP42.
  • the D-type flip-flop DFF maintains the output low level voltage based on the output of the OR gate OG.
  • the output of the comparator CP41 is pulled down to a low level voltage (ie, when the pulse period ends), since the two input terminals of the OR gate OG are both maintained at The low-level voltage causes the output terminal to also output a low-level voltage, so the driver DRV will generate a disable control signal in response to the received low-level voltage to turn off the transistor M42, so that the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp is turned off. .
  • the operation of the signal processing unit 3420 of this embodiment is similar to the detection result latch circuit 3220 of the second preferred embodiment, and the operation of the signal generating unit 3410 is similar to the detection pulse of the second preferred embodiment.
  • the operation of the generation module 3210, the signal acquisition unit 3430 is similar to the detection and determination circuit 3230 of the second preferred embodiment, and the operation of the switch unit 3200d is similar to the operation of the switch circuit 3200b of the second preferred embodiment.
  • FIG. 23A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module 3000e includes a detection pulse generation module 3510, a control circuit 3520, a detection determination circuit 3530, a switch circuit 3200e, and a detection path circuit 3560.
  • the detection determination circuit 3530 is coupled to the detection path circuit 3560 via the path 3561 to detect the signal on the detection path circuit 3560 .
  • the detection and determination circuit 3530 is also coupled to the control circuit 3520 via the path 3531 to transmit the detection result signal to the control circuit 3520 via the path 3531 .
  • the detection pulse generating module 3510 is coupled to the detection path circuit 3560 through the path 3511, and generates a pulse signal to notify the detection path circuit 3560 of the timing point of turning on the detection path or performing the detection operation.
  • the control circuit 3520 latches the detection result according to the detection result signal, and is coupled to the switch circuit 3200e via the path 3521 to transmit or reflect the detection result to the switch circuit 3200e.
  • the switch circuit 3200e determines to turn on or off the first mounting detection terminal TE1 and the second mounting detection terminal TE2 according to the detection result.
  • the detection path circuit 3560 is coupled to the power loop of the power module via the first detection connection terminal DE1 and the second detection connection terminal DE2.
  • the configuration of the detection pulse generation module 3510 may refer to the detection pulse generation module 3110 of FIG. 19B or the detection pulse generation module 3210 of FIG. 20B .
  • the path 3511 in this embodiment can be compared to the pulse signal output terminal 3111 , that is, the OR gate OG1 can be connected to the detection pulse through the path 3511 Path circuit 3560.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3510 is also connected to the output end of the control circuit 3520 through the path 3521, so the path 3521 in this embodiment can be compared to the path 3321.
  • the control circuit 3520 can be implemented by using a control chip or any circuit with signal operation processing capability.
  • the control circuit 3520 determines that the user has not touched the lamp according to the detection result signal, the control circuit 3520 controls the switching state of the switch circuit 3200e, so that the external power can be normally supplied to the rear when the lamp is correctly installed on the lamp socket. end of the LED module. At this time, the control circuit 3520 turns off the detection path.
  • the control circuit 3520 determines that the user touches the lamp according to the detection result signal, the control circuit 3520 maintains the switch circuit 3200e in an off state because the user may be at risk of electric shock.
  • the configuration of the detection determination circuit 3530 may refer to the detection determination circuit 3130 of FIG. 19C or the detection determination circuit 3230 of FIG. 20C .
  • the resistor R14 can be omitted.
  • the path 3561 in this embodiment can be compared to the switch coupling terminal 3201 , that is, the positive input terminal of the comparator CP11 is connected to the detection path circuit 3560 .
  • the path 3531 in this embodiment can be compared to the detection result terminal 3131 , that is, the output terminal of the comparator CP11 is connected to the control circuit 3520 . Referring to FIG.
  • the resistor R24 can be omitted.
  • the path 3561 in this embodiment can be compared to the path 3201 , that is, the anode of the diode D21 is connected to the detection path circuit 3560 .
  • the path 3531 in this embodiment can be compared to the path 3331 , that is, the outputs of the comparators CP21 and CP22 are connected to the control circuit 3520 .
  • the configuration of the switch circuit 3200e may refer to the switch circuit 3200a of FIG. 19E , the switch circuit 3200a of FIG. 19F , or the switch circuit 3200b of FIG. 20E . Since the structures of the two switch circuits are similar, the switch circuit 3200a in FIG. 19E is used as a representative for illustration. Referring to FIG. 19E, when the structure of the switch circuit 3200a is used as the switch circuit 3200e, the path 3521 of this embodiment can be compared to the path detection result latch terminal 3121, and the switch coupling terminal 3201 is not connected to the detection and determination circuit 3130, Instead, it is directly connected to the second installation detection terminal TE2.
  • FIGS. 23B , 23C and 23D are schematic diagrams of circuit structures of the detection path circuit according to different embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection path circuit 3560a includes a transistor M51 and resistors R51 and R52.
  • the transistor M51 has a base, a collector and an emitter, and the emitter is connected to the detection pulse generating module 3510 via the path 3511 .
  • the first end of the resistor R52 is connected to the emitter of the transistor M51, and the second end of the resistor R52 is connected to the ground terminal GND as the second detection connection terminal DE2, that is, the resistor R52 is connected in series between the emitter of the transistor M51 and the ground terminal GND.
  • the first terminal of the resistor R51 is connected to the first installation detection terminal 2521 as the first detection connection terminal DE1, and the first installation detection terminal TE1 is connected to the second rectifier output terminal 512 as an example, that is, the resistance
  • the R51 is connected in series between the collector of the transistor M51 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the detection path of this embodiment is equivalent to the configuration between the rectification output terminal and the ground terminal GND.
  • the transistor M51 when the transistor M51 receives the pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3510 (detection mode), it will be turned on during the pulse period.
  • a detection path from the first installation detection terminal TE1 to the ground terminal GND via the resistor R51, the transistor M51 and the resistor R52
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the voltage division of the resistors R51 and R52.
  • the equivalent resistance of the human body is equivalently connected in series between the second detection connection terminal DE2 and the ground terminal GND, that is, in series with the resistors R51 and R52.
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the resistors R51 and R52 and the equivalent resistance of the human body. Therefore, by setting the resistors R51 and R52 with appropriate resistance values, the voltage signal on the node X can reflect whether the user touches the lamp, so that the detection and determination circuit 3530 can be based on the voltage on the node X.
  • the signal generates a corresponding detection result signal.
  • the transistor M51 when the control circuit 3520 determines that the lamp tube has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the transistor M51 will remain in the off state, so that the power module can operate normally. Operates to power the LED module.
  • FIG. 23C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection path circuit 3560b of this embodiment includes a transistor M52 and resistors R53 and R54, and its configuration and operation are substantially the same as the detection path circuit 3560a of the previous embodiment.
  • the main difference is that the detection path circuit 3560b of this embodiment is arranged in the first Between a rectifier output terminal 511 and a second rectifier output terminal 512 .
  • the first terminal of the resistor R53 (the first detection connection terminal DE1 ) is connected to the first rectification output terminal 511
  • the second terminal of the resistor R54 (the second detection connection terminal DE2 ) is connected to the second rectified output terminal 512.
  • the transistor M52 when the transistor M52 receives the pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3510 (detection mode), it will be turned on during the pulse period.
  • a detection path from the first rectifier output terminal 511 to the second rectifier output terminal 512 via the resistor R53 , the transistor M52 and the resistor R54 ) will respond to the turned-on transistor M52 It is then turned on, and a voltage signal is established on node X of the detection path.
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the voltage division of the resistors R53 and R54.
  • the second detection connection terminal DE2 and the ground terminal GND are electrically connected. flat.
  • the equivalent resistance of the human body is equivalent to being connected in series between the second terminal/second detection connection terminal DE2 of the resistor R54 and the ground terminal GND, that is, in series with the resistors R53 and R54.
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the resistors R51 and R52 and the equivalent resistance of the human body. Therefore, by setting the resistors R51 and R52 with appropriate resistance values, the voltage signal on the node X can reflect whether the user touches the lamp, so that the detection and determination circuit can be based on the voltage signal on the node X. A corresponding detection result signal is generated.
  • the transistor M52 when the control circuit 3520 determines that the lamp tube has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the transistor M52 will remain in the off state, so that the power module can operate normally. Operates to power the LED module.
  • FIG. 23D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the configuration and operation of the detection path circuit 3560c of this embodiment are substantially the same as those of the previous embodiments, the main difference is that the detection path circuit 3560c of this embodiment further includes a current limiting component D51 disposed on the power loop.
  • the current limiting component D51 is an example of a diode (hereinafter referred to as diode D51 ) disposed at the first rectifier output end 511 and the input end of the filter circuit 520 (ie, the connection end of the capacitor 725 and the inductor 726 ).
  • the circuit 520 is shown as an example of a ⁇ -type filter circuit, but the present application is not limited to this.
  • the addition of the diode D51 can limit the direction of the current on the main power circuit, so as to prevent the charged capacitor 725 from discharging the detection path in reverse when the transistor M51 is turned on, thereby affecting the accuracy of the anti-electric shock detection.
  • the configuration of the diode D51 is only an example of a current limiting component, and in other applications, as long as the electronic components that can be arranged on the power circuit and play a role in limiting the current direction can be implemented here , this application is not limited to this.
  • the detection path of this embodiment is additionally established instead of using the power loop as the detection path (ie, the power loop and the detection path do not overlap at least in part). Since the electronic components on the additionally established detection path are less than those on the power circuit, the voltage signal on the additionally established detection path can more accurately reflect the user's touch state.
  • circuits/modules described in this embodiment may also be partially or fully integrated into a chip configuration, as shown in the foregoing FIGS.
  • the installation detection module 3000e can further provide the function of stroboscopic suppression when the LED straight tube lamp is normally lit. Under this structure, as shown in FIG. 23A , the installation detection module 3000e may further include a ripple detection circuit 3580 .
  • the switch circuit 3200e is configured to be connected in series with the LED module (for example, one of the installation detection terminals TE1/TE2 is electrically connected to the cathode of the LED module, and the other is electrically connected to the ground terminal). .
  • the circuit operations of the detection pulse generation module 3510, the control circuit 3520, the detection determination circuit 3530, the detection path circuit 3560 and the switch circuit 3200e in the detection mode are the same as those described above, and control The circuit 3520 does not change its operating state/signal output state in response to the signal output by the ripple detection circuit 3580 in the detection mode.
  • the ripple detection circuit 3580 When the LED straight tube lamp enters the working mode, the ripple detection circuit 3580 will detect the voltage on the installation detection terminal TE2 and generate a corresponding signal and transmit it to the control circuit 3520 .
  • the control circuit 3520 will instead control the switch circuit 3200e to operate in the linear region according to the signal received from the ripple detection circuit 3580, so that the equivalent impedance of the switch circuit 3200e between the two installation detection terminals TE1 and TE2 increases with the ripple.
  • the magnitude of the voltage detected by the detection circuit 3580 changes, so as to achieve the effect of maintaining stable brightness and suppressing flicker.
  • FIG. 23E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module with stroboscopic suppression function according to the first embodiment of the present application. Please refer to FIG. 23E , where the detection module is installed here, only the modules/circuits related to the stroboscopic suppression function are shown for illustration, and the specific module configuration can refer to the above-mentioned embodiments of FIGS. 23A-23D .
  • the switch circuit 3200e includes a transistor M53, wherein the transistor M53 may be, for example, an N-type MOSFET, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • the first terminal (eg, the drain) of the transistor M53 is coupled to the cathode of the LED module 50, and the second terminal (eg, the source) of the transistor M53 is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 via the resistor R55.
  • the transistor M53 is connected in series between the cathode of the LED module 50 and the ground terminal.
  • the ripple detection circuit 3580 detects the voltage on the second end of the transistor M53, and generates a corresponding ripple detection signal to transmit to the control circuit 3520. At this time, the control circuit 3520 will output a corresponding signal so that the equivalent impedance change of the switch circuit 3200e is positively correlated with the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 .
  • the control circuit 3520 when the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 is larger, the control circuit 3520 will output a corresponding signal to make the switch circuit 3200e have a higher equivalent impedance; on the contrary, when the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 is higher When the voltage is smaller, the control circuit 3520 will output a corresponding signal so that the switch circuit 3200e has a lower equivalent impedance. Therefore, the ripple current originally generated by the voltage fluctuation can be regarded as absorbed by the equivalent impedance of the switching circuit 3200e, so that the current passing through the LED module 50 can be substantially maintained within a relatively stable range, thereby realizing the frequency Flash suppression effect.
  • the control circuit 3520 outputs a signal in the working mode so that the switch circuit 3200e can stably operate in the saturation region, that is, in the working mode
  • the equivalent impedance of the switch circuit 3200e does not change substantially due to the change of the drain-source voltage (ignoring the effect of channel length modulation).
  • the control circuit 3520 controls the switch circuit 3200e to operate in the linear region instead of in the saturation region in the working mode, so that the equivalent impedance of the switch circuit 3200e varies with The detected voltage change reduces the stroboscopic phenomenon.
  • FIG. 24A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module 3000f includes a detection pulse generation module 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determination circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200f , and a detection path circuit 3660 .
  • the connection relationship between the detection pulse generating module 3610, the control circuit 3620, the detection determination circuit 3630 and the switch circuit 3200f is the same as that in the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 23A, and they are connected to each other through the corresponding paths 3611, 3621, 3631, and 3661. Repeat again. In this embodiment, the main difference from the previous embodiment of FIG.
  • the 23A lies in the configuration and operation of the detection path circuit 3660 .
  • the first detection connection terminal DE1 of the detection path circuit 3660 in this embodiment is coupled to the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520
  • the second detection connection terminal DE2 is coupled to the second rectification output terminal 512 .
  • the detection path circuit 3660 is connected between the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 and the second rectification output terminal 512 of the rectifier circuit 510, that is, the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 is connected to the filter circuit 520 via the detection path circuit 3660.
  • the second rectification output terminal 512 is connected between the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 and the second rectification output terminal 512 of the rectifier circuit 510, that is, the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 is connected to the filter circuit 520 via the detection path circuit 3660.
  • the second rectification output terminal 512 is connected between the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 and the second rectification output terminal 512 of the
  • FIG. 24B and FIG. 24C are schematic diagrams of circuit structures of the installation detection module according to different embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 24B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the filter circuit 520 is a ⁇ -type filter structure including capacitors 725, 727 and an inductor 726 as an example (this application is not limited to this), that is, the inductor 726 is connected in series with the first rectifier output end 511 and the first rectifier output end 511 and the first Between a filter output end 521 , the first ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 are connected to the two ends of the inductor 726 correspondingly, and the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 are connected together, wherein the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 are low power flat end.
  • the installation detection module includes a detection pulse generation module 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determination circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200f and a detection path circuit 3660 .
  • the detection path circuit 3660 includes a transistor M61 and a resistor R61. The gate of the transistor M61 is coupled to the detection pulse generating module 3610 , the source is coupled to the first end of the resistor R61 , and the drain is coupled to the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 . The second end of the resistor R61 is connected to the second rectification output end 512 and the first installation detection end TE1 as the second detection connection end 3292 .
  • the detection and determination circuit 3630 is coupled to the first end of the resistor R61 to detect the magnitude of the current flowing through the detection loop.
  • the detection loop can be equivalently composed of capacitors 725 and 727 , an inductor 726 , a transistor M61 and a resistor R61 .
  • the transistor M61 when the transistor M61 receives the pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3610 (detection mode), it will be turned on during the pulse period.
  • the current path from the first rectifier output terminal 511 to the second rectifier output terminal 512 via the detection path will be turned on in response to the turned-on transistor M61, and the resistance A voltage signal is established on the first terminal of R61.
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the equivalent impedance of the filter circuit 520 and the voltage division of the resistor R61.
  • the equivalent resistance of the human body is equivalent to being connected in series between the second detection connection terminal and the ground terminal.
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the equivalent impedance of the filter circuit 520 , the resistance R61 and the equivalent resistance of the human body. Therefore, by setting the resistor R61 with a suitable resistance value, the voltage signal on the first end of the resistor R61 can reflect whether the user touches the lamp, so that the detection and determination circuit 3630 can be based on the resistance of the resistor R61.
  • the voltage signal on the first terminal generates a corresponding detection result signal, and the control circuit 3620 can control the conduction state of the switch circuit 3200f according to the detection result signal.
  • the transistor M61 will not be turned on for a short time in the detection mode, and when the control circuit 3620 determines that the lamp tube has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the switch circuit 3200f will be switched to the on state, so that the power module can operate normally. operation to power the LED module.
  • FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module of this embodiment includes a detection pulse generation circuit 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determination circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200f and a detection path circuit 3660 .
  • the configuration and operation of the installed detection module of this embodiment are substantially the same as those of the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 24B , the main difference is that the detection path circuit 3660 of this embodiment is disposed between the second end of the capacitor 725 and the second rectifier output end 512 while the second end of the capacitor 727 is directly connected to the second installation detection end TE2 / the second filter output end 522 .
  • the current size of the current flowing through the detection path circuit 3660 is much smaller than that flowing through the detection path circuit 3560, so
  • the transistor M61/3395 in the detection path circuit 3660 can be implemented with smaller size components, which can effectively reduce the cost; in addition, the resistor R61 can be designed as a relatively small resistor, when the human body resistance is equivalently connected to the lamp, the detection path The change of the equivalent impedance on the sensor will be more obvious, which will make the detection result less susceptible to the influence of the parameter offset of other components.
  • the signal transmission design of the control circuit 3620 and the detection and determination circuit 3630 can more easily meet the signal format requirements of the driving controller, thereby reducing the difficulty of integrating the design of the installation detection module and the driving circuit. (This part will be further described in the subsequent embodiments).
  • FIG. 25A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and an installation detection module 3000g.
  • the installation detection module 3000g includes a detection controller 3100g, a switch circuit 3200g and a bias circuit 3300g, wherein the detection controller 3100g includes a control module 3710, a start-up circuit 3770 and a detection period determination circuit 3780.
  • the configurations and operations of the rectifying circuit 510 , the filtering circuit 520 and the driving circuit 530 can be referred to the descriptions of the related embodiments, which are not repeated here.
  • the switch circuit 3200g is serially connected to the power supply circuit/power supply circuit of the power supply module (the figure shows the connection between the rectifier circuit 510 and the filter circuit 520 as an example), and is controlled by the control module 3710. switch on state.
  • the control module 3710 sends a control signal in the detection mode to briefly turn on the switch circuit 3200g, so as to detect whether there is an additional impedance connected to the power module during the period when the switch circuit 3200g is turned on (ie, the period when the power supply loop/power loop is turned on).
  • the control module 3710 can temporarily turn on the switch circuit 3200g by sending a control signal in the form of a pulse.
  • the specific design of the duration of the short turn-on period can be adjusted according to the impedance of the set detection path.
  • the control module 3710 and the switch circuit 3200g and related control actions reference may be made to other embodiments related to the installation detection module.
  • the bias circuit 3300 is connected to the power loop to generate the driving voltage VCC based on the rectified signal (ie, the bus voltage).
  • the driving voltage VCC is provided to the control module 3710 to enable the control module 3710 to start and operate in response to the driving voltage.
  • the start-up circuit 3770 is connected to the control module 3710 and is used for determining whether to affect the working state of the control module 3710 according to the output signal of the detection period determination circuit 3780 . For example, when the detection period determination circuit 3780 outputs an enable signal, the startup circuit 3770 controls the control module 3710 to stop working in response to the enable signal; when the detection period determination circuit 3780 outputs a disable signal, the startup circuit 3780 In response to the disable signal, the control module 3710 is controlled to maintain a normal working state (ie, the working state of the control module 3710 is not affected).
  • the start-up circuit 3780 can control the control module 3710 to stop working by bypassing the driving voltage VCC or providing a low-level start signal to the enable pin of the control module 3710, which is not limited in this application. .
  • the detection period determination circuit 3780 is used for sampling the electrical signal on the detection path/power loop, thereby counting the working time of the control module 3710, and outputting a signal indicating the counting result to the start-up circuit 3770, so that the start-up circuit 3770 decides based on the signal indicating the counting result The working state of the control module 3710.
  • the control module 3710 When the rectifier circuit 510 receives external power through the pins 501 and 502, the bias circuit 3300g generates the driving voltage VCC according to the rectified bus voltage.
  • the control module 3710 is activated in response to the driving voltage VCC and enters the detection mode. In the detection mode, the control module 3710 periodically sends a control signal with a pulse waveform to the switch circuit 3200g, so that the switch circuit 3200g is periodically turned on for a short time and then turned off.
  • the current waveform on the power loop will be similar to the current waveform in the detection time interval Tw in FIG. 45D (ie, a plurality of current pulses Idp with intervals).
  • the detection period determination circuit 3780 starts to count the working time of the control module 3710 in the detection mode when receiving the bus voltage on the power circuit, and outputs a signal indicating the counting result to the start circuit 3770 .
  • the startup circuit 3770 will not affect the working state of the control module 3710 .
  • the control module 3710 will decide to maintain the detection mode or enter the working mode according to its own detection result. If the control module 3710 determines to enter the working mode, the control module 3710 controls the switch circuit 3200g to maintain the on state, and shields the influence of other signals on its working state. In other words, in the working mode, no matter what kind of signal the startup circuit 3770 outputs, it will not affect the working state of the control module 3710 .
  • the start-up circuit 3770 will control the control module 3710 to stop working in response to the output of the detection period determination circuit 3780 .
  • the control module 3710 no longer issues pulses and maintains the switch circuit 3200g in an off state until the control module 3710 is reset.
  • the set duration is the detection time interval Tw.
  • the installation detection module 3000g can achieve the current waveform shown in Figure 45D to Figure 45F by setting the pulse interval and reset period of the control signal, thereby ensuring that the electric power in the detection mode is still within a reasonable safety range, Avoid detection of current to cause human harm.
  • the start-up circuit 3770 and the detection period decision circuit 3780 can be regarded as a delay control circuit as a whole.
  • a specific path is turned on to control the target circuit (eg, the control module 3710 ).
  • the delay control circuit can realize circuit actions such as delayed turn-on of the power supply loop or delayed turn-off of the installed detection module in the LED straight tube lamp.
  • FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and an installation detection module 3000h.
  • the installation detection module 3000h includes a detection controller 3100h, a switch circuit 3200h and a bias circuit 3300h, wherein the detection controller 3100h includes a control module 3810, a start-up circuit 3870 and a detection period determination circuit 3880.
  • the configuration and operation of the rectifier circuit 510, the filter circuit 520 and the driving circuit 530 can refer to the description of the relevant embodiments; in addition, the configuration and operation of the control module 3810 and the switch circuit 3200h can refer to the description of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 25A, which is not repeated here. Repeat.
  • the bias circuit 3300h includes a resistor R71, a capacitor C71 and a Zener diode ZD1.
  • the first end of the resistor R71 is connected to the rectified output (ie, connected to the bus).
  • the capacitor C71 and the Zener diode ZD1 are connected in parallel with each other, and the first terminal is connected to the second terminal of the resistor R71 in common.
  • the power input terminal of the control module 3810 is connected to the common node of the resistor R71, the capacitor C71 and the Zener diode ZD1 (ie, the bias node of the bias circuit 3300h) to receive the driving voltage VCC on the common node.
  • the start-up circuit 3870 includes a Zener diode ZD2, a transistor M71 and a capacitor C72.
  • the anode of the Zener diode ZD2 is connected to the control terminal of the transistor M71.
  • the first terminal of the transistor M71 is connected to the control module 3810, and the second terminal of the transistor M71 is connected to the ground terminal GND.
  • the capacitor C72 is connected between the first terminal and the second terminal of the transistor M71.
  • the detection period determination circuit 3880 includes a resistor R72, a diode D71 and a capacitor C73.
  • the first end of the resistor R72 is connected to the bias node of the bias circuit 3300, and the second end of the resistor R72 is connected to the cathode of the Zener diode ZD2.
  • the anode of diode D71 is connected to the second terminal of resistor R72, and the cathode of diode D71 is connected to the first terminal of resistor R72.
  • the first terminal of the capacitor C73 is connected to the second terminal of the resistor R72 and the anode of the diode D71, and the second terminal of the capacitor C73 is connected to the ground terminal GND.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 receives external power through the pins 501 and 502, the rectified bus voltage will charge the capacitor C71, thereby establishing the driving voltage VCC on the bias node.
  • the control module 3810 is activated in response to the driving voltage VCCVCC and enters the detection mode. In the detection mode, from the first signal cycle, the control module 3810 sends a control signal with a pulse waveform to the switch circuit 3200h, so that the switch circuit 3200h turns on briefly and then turns off.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)

Abstract

La présente invention concerne un module d'avertissement de mauvaise utilisation (580, 680), comprenant un circuit de détection (583 683) et un circuit d'invite (584, 684). Le circuit de détection (583, 683) est électriquement connecté à une boucle d'alimentation électrique, et est utilisé pour détecter le type d'un signal de puissance externe et le niveau de courant dans la boucle et pour délivrer en sortie un signal de détection ; et le circuit d'invite (584, 684) est utilisé pour émettre une invite de mauvaise utilisation en fonction du signal de détection pour avertir un utilisateur qu'une lampe à DEL accède à une alimentation électrique externe inapplicable.
PCT/CN2022/071054 2015-03-10 2022-01-10 Lampe à del et module d'avertissement de mauvaise utilisation WO2022148463A1 (fr)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/219,737 US20240093841A1 (en) 2015-03-10 2023-07-10 LED lamp and misuse warning module thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110032557 2021-01-11
CN202110032557.3 2021-01-11
CN202110049979 2021-01-14
CN202110049979.1 2021-01-14
CN202110048805.3 2021-01-14
CN202110048805 2021-01-14
CN202110708563.6 2021-06-25
CN202110708563 2021-06-25

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/075,549 Continuation-In-Part US11754232B2 (en) 2015-03-10 2022-12-06 LED lamp and power source module thereof related applications

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/219,737 Continuation-In-Part US20240093841A1 (en) 2015-03-10 2023-07-10 LED lamp and misuse warning module thereof

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022148463A1 true WO2022148463A1 (fr) 2022-07-14

Family

ID=82357959

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/071054 WO2022148463A1 (fr) 2015-03-10 2022-01-10 Lampe à del et module d'avertissement de mauvaise utilisation

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (2) CN218570514U (fr)
WO (1) WO2022148463A1 (fr)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115840159A (zh) * 2022-09-19 2023-03-24 大庆恒驰电气有限公司 智能机器人

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1942707A1 (fr) * 2007-01-04 2008-07-09 Applied Materials, Inc. Détecteur de panne de lampe
CN101272652A (zh) * 2007-03-19 2008-09-24 上海市闵行中学 一种路灯检测装置和检测方法
CN204028258U (zh) * 2014-08-28 2014-12-17 北京铨富光电科技有限公司 一种电子镇流器的led光源负载检测电路
CN108802603A (zh) * 2018-07-01 2018-11-13 刘贻有 用多组led指示电子镇流器测试电流的测试仪
CN211955768U (zh) * 2018-08-30 2020-11-17 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司 安装检测装置及led直管灯
CN212163776U (zh) * 2018-04-12 2020-12-15 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司 一种侦测模块、电源模块及led直管灯

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1942707A1 (fr) * 2007-01-04 2008-07-09 Applied Materials, Inc. Détecteur de panne de lampe
CN101272652A (zh) * 2007-03-19 2008-09-24 上海市闵行中学 一种路灯检测装置和检测方法
CN204028258U (zh) * 2014-08-28 2014-12-17 北京铨富光电科技有限公司 一种电子镇流器的led光源负载检测电路
CN212163776U (zh) * 2018-04-12 2020-12-15 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司 一种侦测模块、电源模块及led直管灯
CN108802603A (zh) * 2018-07-01 2018-11-13 刘贻有 用多组led指示电子镇流器测试电流的测试仪
CN211955768U (zh) * 2018-08-30 2020-11-17 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司 安装检测装置及led直管灯

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115840159A (zh) * 2022-09-19 2023-03-24 大庆恒驰电气有限公司 智能机器人

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN220711687U (zh) 2024-04-02
CN218570514U (zh) 2023-03-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN111801989B (zh) 一种led直管灯及led照明系统
US10605415B2 (en) LED tube lamp
US10571081B2 (en) LED tube lamp and driving method therefor
CN112628620B (zh) 一种安装侦测装置及应用之的电源模块装置和led灯
JP4370901B2 (ja) Ｌｅｄ点灯装置
US11543086B2 (en) LED tube lamp
WO2021043269A1 (fr) Circuit de protection contre les surtensions, dispositif d'alimentation électrique utilisant celui-ci, et dispositif d'éclairage à del
CN212163776U (zh) 一种侦测模块、电源模块及led直管灯
CN210444530U (zh) 安装侦测模块、电源模块及应用所述模块的led直管灯
JP2009134945A (ja) Ｌｅｄ点灯装置及びｌｅｄ照明器具
CN211955768U (zh) 安装检测装置及led直管灯
WO2020088521A1 (fr) Lampe droite à del et son module d'alimentation électrique
WO2022148463A1 (fr) Lampe à del et module d'avertissement de mauvaise utilisation
CN211959612U (zh) 一种led直管灯及其电源模块和一种led照明系统
JP5140203B2 (ja) Ｌｅｄ点灯装置
CN209856808U (zh) 一种led直管灯
CN210298147U (zh) 一种led直管灯及其灯座、灯具、电源电路和检测电路
CN211481558U (zh) 一种led直管灯、电源模块及其滤波电路与安装侦测模块
CN210112321U (zh) 一种led直管灯照明系统
WO2022161187A1 (fr) Lampe à diode électroluminescente
US20240093841A1 (en) LED lamp and misuse warning module thereof
JP5193379B2 (ja) Ｌｅｄ点灯装置及びｌｅｄ照明器具
US20240019088A1 (en) Led lamp and power source module thereof
JP5193378B2 (ja) Ｌｅｄ点灯装置及びｌｅｄ照明器具
JP5140202B2 (ja) Ｌｅｄ点灯装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22736624

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22736624

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1